LEON OWNER’S MANUAL
Inglés 1P0012003CL (07.09) (GT9)
1P0012003CL
LEON Inglés (07.09)
Portada LEON.qxd:Maquetación 1 1/9/09 13:33 Página 3
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com-
prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehículo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la
técnica. Por esta razón, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basándose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente
Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la información en el momento de la realización de la
impresión. Salvo error u omisión, la información recogida en el presente manual es válida en la fecha de cierre de su edición.
No está permitida la reimpresión, la reproducción o la traducción, total o parcial, sin la autorización escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos según la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificación.
;
Este papel está fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
© SEAT S.A. - Reimpresión: 15.07.09
Portada LEON_interior.qxd:maquetación 1/9/09 13:34 Página 1
Foreword
This Instruction manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with
your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will contribute to preserve its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts change.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the
vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Leon_EN.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Contents 3
Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving with LPG* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control* (Cruise control - GRA) . . . . . . . .
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
(ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
16
19
19
20
23
27
29
29
32
35
39
42
44
44
46
49
53
53
53
55
58
59
66
75
85
85
85
89
93
93
99
100
102
104
106
108
111
111
119
121
121
125
129
129
130
132
134
135
137
139
140
143
143
145
149
153
155
155
156
157
158
161
162
165
166
171
173
176
181
181
181
182
183
188
188
189
Leon_EN.book Seite 3 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Contents4
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 bhp) . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 l 155 kW (211 HP) . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 177 kW (240 hp). Cupra
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 195 kW (265 bhp). Cupra R
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 66 kW (90 HP) . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp).
Ecomotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 litre TDI 77 kW (105 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 l 103 kW (140 HP) . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
192
193
193
194
194
195
197
197
198
204
206
206
206
207
207
208
208
210
213
214
215
218
222
224
227
229
232
232
240
240
242
247
249
254
263
266
269
269
269
271
272
272
273
273
274
275
276
277
279
280
281
283
284
285
286
288
289
291
293
Leon_EN.book Seite 4 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Manual structure 5
Manual structure
What you should know before reading the on-board manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON, some of the equipment and
functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or
variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified in accord-
ance with technical or market requirements or model year; this can not be
interpreted as dishonest advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain
versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,
or else it is only on sale in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol
does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
This shows the end of the section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain safety information. They warn you
of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution
Texts preceded by this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of
damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol refer to relevant points concerning environ-
mental protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
Leon_EN.book Seite 5 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Content6
Content
This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised
way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to
chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire manual is divided into five large
parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Practical tips
Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical Data
Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
Leon_EN.book Seite 6 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving 7
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety
and for your passengers safety.
WARNING
• This manual contains important information concerning the driver's
and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the on
board manual also contain further information that you should be aware of
for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
• Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury in the event of acci-
dent.
Never “put” your safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The
following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
• three-point seat belts,
• belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats,
• belt tension devices for the front seats,
• belt height adjustment for the front seats,
• front airbags,
• side airbags in the front seat backrests,
• side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
• curtain airbags,
• crash-active front head restraints*,
• “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the rear side seats with the
“ISOFIX” system,
• height-adjustable head restraints,
• head restraints with in-use position and non-use position,
• adjustable steering column.
Leon_EN.book Seite 7 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving8
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in the event of accidents.
But this safety equipment cannot neither help you nor your passengers if you
or they are sitting in an incorrect position or do not properly adjust or use this
equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before starting every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
– Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
– Securely restrain all parcels ⇒ page 16.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according
to your size.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the
head restraints in the in-use position ⇒ page 14
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly
applied seat belts ⇒ page 44.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers
also to assume a proper sitting position ⇒ page 10.
– Fasten your safety belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to
fasten their seat belts properly ⇒ page 19.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and
the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any circum-
stance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road ⇒ ,
for this reason:
– Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you,
e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Leon_EN.book Seite 8 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving 9
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Leon_EN.book Seite 9 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving10
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a
safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driver:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ fig. 1.
– Move the driver's seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
your knees still slightly angled ⇒ .
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ fig. 2.
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper
distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Proper head
restraint position for
driver
Leon_EN.book Seite 10 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving 11
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Fasten your safety belt securely ⇒ page 19.
– Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat ⇒ page 129.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
• Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel ⇒ page 10,
fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
you properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the
risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
• Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other
manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the
airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu-
vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag
system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt
properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect
sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest
possible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒ .
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ page 13.
– Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front passenger seat.
– Fasten your safety belt securely ⇒ page 19.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances ⇒ page 24.
For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
⇒ page 132.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
Leon_EN.book Seite 11 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving12
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between
your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm,
the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor-
rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a
sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain
severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden
braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection
when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is
wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to
the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the
belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
consider the following:
– Adjust the headrest to the correct position ⇒ page 14.
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat.
–Fasten your safety belt securely ⇒ page 19.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children
in the vehicle ⇒ page 44.
WARNING
• If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
• Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protec-
tion.
• Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an
upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly.
If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position, the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 12 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving 13
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ fig. 3 and ⇒ fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 129.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the
passenger's height.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The
resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the crash-active head
restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the
same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's
head and the head rest, thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
Leon_EN.book Seite 13 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving14
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the
passenger's height.
Note
The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by “falling” back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous
as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-
ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations
Rear outer seat head restraints
– The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 positions.
–Three positions for use ⇒ fig. 5. In these positions, the head
restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along with
the rear seat belts.
– And one position for non-use.
– To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 5 Head restraints in
correct position
Leon_EN.book Seite 14 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving 15
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Centre rear head restraint
– The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the
head restraints are in the non-use position.
• Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat
rear head restraints.
• Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints ⇒ page 130.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to
occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially
reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect belt web position. As the driver, you are
responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children.
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be
dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to
make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
• Never stand in the vehicle,
• never stand on the seats,
• never kneel on the seats,
• never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
• never lean against the dash panel,
• never lie on the rear bench,
• never sit on the front edge of a seat,
• never sit sideways,
• never lean out of a window,
• never put your feet out of a window,
• never put your feet on the dash panel,
• never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
• never travel in a foot well ,
• never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
• never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries
if airbags trigger, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incorrect
sitting position.
• Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main-
tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to
assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip
⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for occupants”.
Leon_EN.book Seite 15 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving16
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects
or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened on the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
order to stop the vehicle.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
• Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
• Never place objects on the driver footwell. An object could move into
the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving
or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒ .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
fied dealership. Fasteners* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
WARNING
• If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-
ries.
• Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
• Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor
mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk
of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the boot
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Leon_EN.book Seite 16 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving 17
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
– Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings ⇒ page 17.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other objects in the boot could cause serious inju-
ries.
• Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
• Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of
fatal injury.
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style
accordingly, to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the
allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door
behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal
risk.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the
vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every
passenger must be properly belted in ⇒ page 19.
Note
• Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
• Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the boot for fastening
luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings ⇒ in “Loading the
boot” on page 16.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of “kinetic
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 17 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Safe driving18
energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
• If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings
with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the
event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward,
always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
• Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
Leon_EN.book Seite 18 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts 19
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Seat belts
Brief Introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
• If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries
increases.
• Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden
braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen-
gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.
• Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat
belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju-
ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two on the front part and three on the rear part.
Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
• More people than available seats must never be transported in your
vehicle.
• Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
– Fasten your safety belt securely.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before
driving off.
– Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's
height and weight.
After the ignition has been switched on, the warning lamp on the instru-
ment panel lights up
1)
if the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and a
warning signal is heard if the vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h for 90
seconds.
1)
Depending on the model version
Leon_EN.book Seite 19 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts20
The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving ⇒ fig. 6 there is a certain amount of
energy known as “kinetic energy”, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the
greater the weight, the more energy there is to be “released” in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-
plied by four.
Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the
entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
⇒ fig. 7.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
sion can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a
frontal collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was
Fig. 6 Vehicle about to hit
a wall: the occupants are
not wearing seat belts
Fig. 7 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat belts
Leon_EN.book Seite 20 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts 21
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-
dents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with
the steering wheel, dashboard, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
⇒ fig. 8.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. When triggered,
airbags provide only additional protection. All passengers (including the
driver) must wear seat belts properly during the trip. This will reduce the risk
of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether an
airbag is fitted for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ⇒ fig. 9.
Fig. 8 A driver not
wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently.
Fig. 9 The unbelted rear
passenger is thrown
forward violently, hitting
the driver wearing a seat
belt.
Leon_EN.book Seite 21 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts22
Seat belts protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of
injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown properly that wearing seat belts is an effective mean of substan-
tially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a
serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing
a seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your
passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can reduce the risk of
injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this booklet.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not
damaged.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only
if you use them properly.
Fig. 10 Driver wearing
the seat belt properly: is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
Leon_EN.book Seite 22 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts 23
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The
other passengers must also wear the seat belt, otherwise they may be
danger of injury!
• The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi-
tioned correctly.
• Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
• Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the
vehicle is in motion.
• Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
• The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
• The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
• Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
• Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
• Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
• The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other
objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
• Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter
the position of the belt webbing.
• Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors
or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci-
dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
• Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be
replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there
is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
• The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly ⇒ page 205.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked into
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
Leon_EN.book Seite 23 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts24
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ page 23, fig. 11.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices ⇒ page 27.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the
seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
• If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her
properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe
injuries.
• Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in
group 0, 0+ or 1 ⇒ page 44.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are
properly positioned.
Fig. 12 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
Leon_EN.book Seite 24 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts 25
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
• belt height adjustment for the front seats.
• front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder,
never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso
⇒ page 24, fig. 12.
• The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the
stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis ⇒ page 24,
fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 22.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web
is properly positioned ⇒ page 24.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ page 10.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and
as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ fig. 14.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ .
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
Fig. 14 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
Leon_EN.book Seite 25 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts26
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 22.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
– Press the red button on the belt buckle ⇒ fig. 15. The latch plate
is released and springs out ⇒ .
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
is not damaged.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position
of the seat belt at the shoulder.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the
proper belt position at the shoulder.
Fig. 15 Removing latch
plate from buckle
Fig. 16 Location of the
belt height adjuster
Leon_EN.book Seite 26 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts 27
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position ⇒ page 26, fig. 16.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt ⇒ page 24.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them during the trip.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of seat belts ⇒ page 22.
Belt tension devices
Function of the belt tension device
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices.
Sensors will only trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on,
lateral and rear collisions, and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
The belt tension device can be triggered only once.
The belt tension devices will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
• If the belt tension devices are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
• The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension devices
The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed
in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove
and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat
Leon_EN.book Seite 27 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seat belts28
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension
devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases.
The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong
circumstances.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt
tension devices or seat belts.
• The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor
cannot be repaired.
• Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the
removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work,
must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
• The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident
and must be changed it they have been activated.
Leon_EN.book Seite 28 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 29
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before driving:
– Always wear the seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
– Adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel correctly
⇒ page 10.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly ⇒ page 11.
– Adjust the head restraint correctly ⇒ page 13.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle ⇒ page 44.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle
assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an
indication as to why the airbags had been triggered.
WARNING
• Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi-
tion can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
• All occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can
sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. You should always
transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while
travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially
increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further
increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
• To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
Leon_EN.book Seite 29 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system30
• Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if
he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport
all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.
That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch ⇒ page 42.
When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size
of each child ⇒ page 44.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
• If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child
of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
• Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju-
ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
• An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat
and hurl it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• If, under special circumstances, it is necessary to transport a child in a
rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential
that you observe the following safety measures:
− Disable the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 42, “Deactivating
airbags*”.
− The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
− Follow the installation instructions given by the child seat manufac-
turer and observe the safety instructions ⇒ page 44, “Child safety”.
− Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat completely backwards so that the greatest possible distance to
the front passenger airbag is ensured.
− Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
− The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright
position.
Warning lamp for airbag and belt tension device system
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension
device system.
The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the
vehicle, including control units and wiring connections.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 30 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 31
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly
monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp
lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*
shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp
:
• does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
• after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
• it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
• lights up or flashes while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system
cannot properly perform its protective function.
• If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a
qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag
system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be trig-
gered correctly.
Repairs, maintenance and disposal of the airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If you work on the airbag system or remove and fit parts of the system when
performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged.
The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates
incorrectly or does not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
Vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used
incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may
fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
• Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft
plastic surface of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dashboard,
and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.
• It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a
water-moistened cloth. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module
surface with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to
become porous. If the airbag triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could
cause substantial injuries.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
• Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag
components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should
be performed only by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the
necessary tools, repair information and qualified personnel.
Leon_EN.book Seite 31 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system32
• We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work
on the airbag system.
• Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 17 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the instrument panel
⇒ fig. 18. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a
severe frontal collision ⇒ page 35, “Safety notes on the frontal airbag
system”.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags
can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety ⇒ page 19,
“Brief Introduction”.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 17 Driver airbag
located in steering wheel
Fig. 18 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
Leon_EN.book Seite 32 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 33
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 30.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp
• does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 30
• after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
• it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
• lights up or flashes while the car is moving.
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
• the ignition is switched off,
• there is a minor frontal collision,
• there is a side collision,
• there is a rear-end collision,
• the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision
the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of frontal airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
deploy in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 19. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occupants to see forward.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
Fig. 19 Inflated front
airbags
Leon_EN.book Seite 33 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system34
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel and dash panel when the
driver and front passenger airbags deploy ⇒ fig. 20. The airbag covers
remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags
are triggered
Leon_EN.book Seite 34 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 35
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Safety notes on the frontal airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the
vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and
head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the
occupant.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while
travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially
increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further
increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
• Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint
system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain
serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 44, “Child
safety”.
• The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags
must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
• It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The side airbags are located in the backrest cushions of the driver seat
⇒ fig. 21 and the front passenger seat as well as in the rear seats. The loca-
tions are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests.
Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-
pants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ⇒ page 38, “Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system”.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
Fig. 21 Side airbag in
driver seat
Leon_EN.book Seite 35 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system36
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety ⇒ page 19, “Brief Introduction”.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
• the ignition is switched off,
• there is a minor side collision,
• there is a frontal collision,
• there is a rear-end collision,
• the vehicle turns over.
The main parts of the airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front and rear seats
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 30.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
WARNING
• In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do
not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors,
due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door
panel.
• Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
• Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
• Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been
correctly closed.
• Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
• Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified author-
ised workshop.
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision,
the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 36 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 37
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle ⇒ page 37, fig. 22.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Fig. 22 Illustration of
principle: inflated side
airbags on left side of
vehicle
Leon_EN.book Seite 37 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system38
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
• If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if
the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the
deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or
other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach
any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
• Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the
backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the
side airbags would not be triggered.
• Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the
driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the
side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct
the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness ⇒ page 206,
“Accessories, parts replacement and modifications”.
• Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the
side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
• When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose them-
selves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is
particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical
consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 44, “Child safety”.
• Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must
be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 38 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 39
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
⇒ fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision ⇒ page 40, “Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system”.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety ⇒ page 19,
“Brief Introduction”.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front
passenger and passengers on the rear seats,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 30.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered
• the ignition is switched off,
Fig. 23 Location of left curtain airbag
Leon_EN.book Seite 39 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system40
• there is a frontal collision,
• there is a rear-end collision,
• if the vehicle rolls,
• during a minor side collision,
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme-
diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a
collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle ⇒ fig. 24.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• For safety reasons, the head air bag must be disconnected in those
vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. See an
Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment.
Fig. 24 Deployed curtain
airbags
Leon_EN.book Seite 40 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 41
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu-
pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags
so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side
windows ⇒ page 206, “Accessories, parts replacement and modifica-
tions”.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not
hang the clothes on coat hangers.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
• Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must
be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 41 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system42
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the
frontal airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle
remain functional.
Disabling front passenger airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove
box to the position OFF ⇒ fig. 25.
– Check that the warning lamp “OFF” on the instrument panel
⇒ fig. 26 remains lit when the ignition is switched on ⇒ .
Enabling front passenger airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key-operated switch in the glove
box to the position ON ⇒ fig. 25.
Fig. 25 In the glovebox:
key for enabling and disa-
bling front passenger
airbag
Fig. 26 Warning lamp for
deactivated passenger
airbag in centre console
Leon_EN.book Seite 42 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Airbag system 43
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does
⇒ page 42, fig. 26 not light up when the ignition is switched on
⇒ .
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
• You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use
a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. ⇒ page 44, “Child safety”.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in
exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on
the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger
airbag.
• As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
• Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other-
wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that
in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not
deploy at all.
• When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG
OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled,
there may be a fault in the airbag system:
− Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work-
shop.
− Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front
passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault
in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju-
ries.
− It is predictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy
during an accident! Warn all your passengers of this.
• When using the ignition key to activate / deactivate the passenger front
airbag, only the passenger front airbag will be activated / deactivated. The
side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 43 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety44
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the
rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint
system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and
weight. For safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in
the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children. ⇒ page 20, “Why wear seat belts?”.
But unlike adults, children do not have muscle and bone structures fully
developed. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by “Peke”
2)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
⇒ page 45.
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,
the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.
2)
Not for all countries
Leon_EN.book Seite 44 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety 45
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
⇒ page 46.
– Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is
necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger
seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 42,
“Deactivating airbags*”. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment
option, move it to the highest position.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while travelling.
• Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child!
• Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly
secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,
the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries
to themselves and to the other passengers.
• If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving,
they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is trig-
gered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.
• A suitable child seat can protect your child!
• Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the
vehicle.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
• Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat
belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident.
• Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
on any sharp edges.
• Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision
or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
• The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is
properly positioned ⇒ page 23, “Seat belts”.
• Only one child may occupy a child seat ⇒ page 46, “Child seats”.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 45 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety46
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R. It means that:
Economic Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration ⇒ fig. 27.
Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,
the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 45.
Fig. 27 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat.
Leon_EN.book Seite 46 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety 47
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Child seats using the “ISOFIX” system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,
the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 45.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,
the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
protected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints together
with properly worn seat belts ⇒ fig. 29.
Fig. 28 A category 1
forward-facing child seat
fitted on the rear seat.
Fig. 29 Forward-facing
child seat installed on rear
seat.
Leon_EN.book Seite 47 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety48
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre
of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie
close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the
pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack ⇒ page 23, “Seat belts”.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 45.
Leon_EN.book Seite 48 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety 49
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on
the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
• Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
• Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the “ISOFIX” system can be
secured, without fastening seat belts, with the “ISOFIX” securing rings
⇒ page 49.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt).
*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible
and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the “ISOFIX” anchors.
WARNING
• When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a
restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is
necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger
seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 42,
“Deactivating airbags*” and move the seat to its highest position, in case
it has this adjustment.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 45.
Securing child seat with the “ISOFIX” system
The child seat with “ISOFIX” system can be secured quickly,
easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
Category Weight
Seat locations
Front
passenger
Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Fig. 30 ISOFIX securing
rings
Leon_EN.book Seite 49 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Child safety50
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
– Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
– Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear
floor. The access to “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear back rest and the seat.
Child seats with “ISOFIX” mountings are available in your Authorised Service
Centres.
WARNING
• The retaining rings are designed only to be used with “ISOFIX” child
seats.
• Never secure child seats without the “ISOFIX” system, retaining belts
or objects to the fastening rings – this can result in potentially fatal injuries
to the child.
• Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly to the “ISOFIX”
anchors.
Leon_EN.book Seite 50 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
51
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Leon_EN.book Seite 51 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
52
Fig. 31 Dash panel
Leon_EN.book Seite 52 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 53
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Controls and equipment
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the dash panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash panel:
− Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of
the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
− Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio/Navigator*
Right seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls on the centre console:
− Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Tyre pressure control
− Park Pilot* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Cigarette lighter / Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Wing mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Start-Stop* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . .
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering column control lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
A
1
A
2
111
A
3
115
A
4
115
A
5
A
6
1
18, 176
A
7
85
A
8
55
59
75
A
9
29
A
10
121, 61
A
11
133
A
12
143
145
149
A
13
A
14
133
A
15
29
A
16
135
A
17
136
A
18
166
A
19
93
183
173
137
126
162
A
20
171
A
21
116
A
22
42
A
23
A
24
157
A
25
155
A
26
215
A
27
106
Leon_EN.book Seite 53 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit54
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
A
28
106
A
29
106
Leon_EN.book Seite 54 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 55
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of dash panel: Dash panel
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 56
Multi-function display ⇒ page 59
Engine coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 56
Rev counter ⇒ page 57
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button ⇒ page 57
Speedometer ⇒ page 57
Fig. 32 Detailed view of dash panel: Dash panel
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 55 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit56
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Dash panel fuel gauge.
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone ⇒ fig. 33 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to
refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears on the dash panel display
3)
PLEASE REFUEL
[XXX]*.
Engine coolant temperature display
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads ⇒ fig. 34.
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of
the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard,
especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long
as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning* text appears on the
dash panel display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* ⇒ page 75, fig. 48 will light up if the needle is in the
warning zone. The following warning appears on the dash panel display
4)
.
3)
Depending on the version of the model.
Fig. 33 Dash panel: fuel
gauge
4)
Depending on the version of the model.
Fig. 34 Dash panel
engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 56 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 57
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level ⇒ page 222
⇒ .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn-
ings ⇒ page 215.
Caution
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone ⇒ page 55, fig. 32 indicates the maximum
engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to
change up a into a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot
off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution
The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up into higher gears early will help you to save fuel and minimise
engine noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equipped with a digital odometer and a trip counter, in
addition to a service intervals display.
During the running-in period, the instructions shown on ⇒ page 188 should
be followed.
Setting the digital clock*
The digital clock is located in the dash panel display.
– Turn the setting knob ⇒ page 55, fig. 32 clockwise until the
first “click” to set the hour. The hour will flash. To change the
hour, press the button.
– Turn the setting knob clockwise to the second “click” to set the
minutes. The minutes will flash. To change the minutes, press the
button.
A
4
A
5
Leon_EN.book Seite 57 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit58
LPG system*
LPG gauge
LPG system filler level display
The LPG tank ⇒ in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres at an
outside temperature of 15°C ⇒ page 210, “Refuelling with LPG”.
The level of LPG in the tank is shown by the five control lights ⇒ fig. 35
and . It varies with the outside temperatures.
When the LPG tank is full, the blue lights come on and as the level goes
down the blue lights go out. When the level reaches the reserve, the lamp,
, comes on.
When the LPG tank is empty, a long warning buzz is heard. Warning lamp
comes on and warning lamps flash slowly. To switch off the warning
buzzer, press the switch . Refill with LPG at the earliest opportunity.
If while driving with LPG, a sudden warning buzz is heard, lamp lights up
and lamps flash quickly, this means that there is a fault in the LPG system.
To switch off the warning buzzer, press the switch . Take the vehicle
to a specialised workshop to check the LPG system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe
burns and other injury.
• Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
• When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical,
to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Fig. 35 Centre console: gas system control warning
lights and switch.
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
2
A
A
GAS
A
1
A
2
A
A
GAS
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 58 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 59
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Note
• The values shown in the average fuel consumption and the fuel remaining
displays on the MFA display
5)
on the dash panel insert are approximate value
only.
• Please check the fuel level on the petrol tank fuel level indicator on the
dash panel ⇒ page 56
• If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-
ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.
Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
Digital display in the dash panel
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the dash panel shows, amongst other things,
the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector lever
position.
Digital clock display ⇒ page 57. On the right of the display: Selector
lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of
the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)* is high-
lighted.
Ambient temperature.
Distance display or flexible service interval display*.
5)
Optional equipment
Fig. 36 Detail of the dash
panel insert: screen with
different indicators
A
1
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 59 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit60
Displayed categories*
The display on the dash panel shows the mileage and trip
recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Clock: “Setting the time”. On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-
tion display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of the
selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highlighted.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
– Optional indicators: e.g. those on the multi-function display (MFD)
– Automatic indicators: Information texts and warnings.
– Menus providing further information and which can be used to make
diverse settings are also shown: “Dash panel menus”
Ambient temperature.
Distance display or flexible service interval display.
Recommended gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot
will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an
arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should
change up or down.
Mileage display or Service Interval Display
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding down
the reset button ⇒ page 55, fig. 32 for a few seconds.
Fig. 37 Digital display in
the dash panel
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Fig. 38 Gear display
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 60 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 61
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due
soon. A “spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance
that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will
change after approximately 10 seconds. A “clock symbol” appears and the
number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The
following message is shown in the dash panel display: SERV. IN ... KM OR ...
DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after
the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can
be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the
rocker switch of the MFI ⇒ fig. 39 .
With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by
pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
information.
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you information on
the journey and fuel consumption.
A
B
Fig. 39 Rocker buttons A
and B. Steering wheel
controls.
Fig. 40 Digital display in
the dash panel
Leon_EN.book Seite 61 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit62
The multi-function system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual
memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
– When the ignition is on, briefly press button ⇒ page 61, fig. 39
on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to
another or press button on the steering wheel controls
⇒ page 61, fig. 39.
Resetting a memory
– Select the memory that you would like to reset.
– Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button
on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-
neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.
The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display
(MFD) by operating the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 41 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Fig. 41 Rocker buttons A
and B. Steering wheel
controls.
Fig. 42 Digital dash
panel display: average
fuel consumption indi-
cator.
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 62 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 63
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Memory displays
• Driving speed
• Journey duration
• Average speed
• Distance
• Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
• Average fuel consumption
• Current fuel consumption
• Ambient temperature display
• Speed warning
Km/h - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown on the display.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Økm/h - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately
100 metres. Dashes will appear in the display until that time. The display will
be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1,999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
Ø litre/100 km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown ⇒ page 62, fig. 42 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds
while the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
l/100 km or l/hr - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 190.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45°C to +58°C. At temperatures
lower than +4°C, an “ice crystal symbol” is displayed and a “warning” sounds
if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will
flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises
above +4°C or 6°C if it was already lit.
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If
the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning text is displayed on the screen
6)
and a warning signal sounds.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).
6)
Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be
represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 63 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit64
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol”
is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information text in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. An
audible warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
(priority 2).
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information
in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note
In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-
cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-
sional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
report.
Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red)
• Brake system symbol with the warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID
SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.
• Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP SEE COOLANT SERVICE
MANUAL.
• Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL.
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 64 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 65
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
reports have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow):
7)
• Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
• Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank
⇒ page 224.
7)
Depending on the version of the model.
Leon_EN.book Seite 65 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit66
Dash panel menus*
Example of menu use
All the menus on the dash panel may be used according to
the following procedure. The dash panel menus may vary
according to the version of the model.
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to
use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using
winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu with the MFD lever
– Switch the ignition on.
– Hold down button for two seconds to return to main menu
from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation
until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the menu “Configuration” with the MFD lever
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between
two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
– Select menu Configuration.
Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper
lever: button A to confirm
the menu selection and
rocker switch B to change
the menu
Fig. 44 Steering wheel
controls: button A to
confirm the menu selec-
tion and switch B to
change the menu
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 66 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 67
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura-
tion menu is opened.
2. Access the “Configuration” menu with the steering wheel
controls
– To access the “Configuration” menu, press button
⇒ page 66, fig. 44 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in
this menu.
3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres”
– Select option Winter tyres using switch .
– Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
– Use button to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 km/h
and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
– Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the
button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed
warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu “Winter tyres”
–In the menu select Back.
The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu “Winter tyres”
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
On the display
Winter tyres
Function
Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deac-
tivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h
-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h
Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and the last
displayed menu is shown.
Leon_EN.book Seite 67 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit68
Main menu
The menu provides access to the different display functions
(only with the MFD lever).
Open main menu
– Switch the ignition on.
– Press and hold the eject button for at least 2 seconds. It may
be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is
displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of rocker switch . The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines.
– Press button to select the entry.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 66
Fig. 45 Windscreen wiper
lever (MFD): button A to
confirm the menu selec-
tion and rocker switch B to
change the menu
Fig. 46 Digital dash
panel display: Main menu
Main menu Function
Multi-function dis-
play
Change to the multi-function display (MFD): “Multi-
function display (MFD)”
Audio The current station will be shown when the radio is
switched on.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with
a navigation system. The navigation system must be
switched on. When the route guidance is activated,
the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed.
The display is similar to that of the Navigation sys-
tem.
If the route guidance is not activated, the direction of
travel (compass) and the name of the street along
which you are driving are shown.
A
B
A
B
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 68 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 69
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Multi-function display menu (MFD)
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you information on
the journey and fuel consumption.
The multifunction display (MFD) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip
memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory is shown on the upper
right hand section of the display ⇒ fig. 47 at all times.
Open the multifunction display menu
–Select the Multifunction display menu from the main menu ⇒ page 68
and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-
tion lever*.
Selecting a memory
– To change from one memory to another, briefly press button
⇒ page 66, fig. 43 ⇒ page 66 on the windscreen wiper lever or the
button on the multifunction lever ⇒ page 66, fig. 44 ⇒ page 66 while
the ignition is switched on.
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with
a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: “Fixed tel-
ephone installation”
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information
texts: “Vehicle status menu”
This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-
played.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when
using winter tyres, units, language, independent
heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Con-
venience menu to be reset.
Fig. 47 Multifunction
display (MFD) dash panel
display.
OK
A
A
OK
Leon_EN.book Seite 69 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit70
Resetting a memory
– Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.
– Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on
the multifunction* steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.
The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance trav-
elled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Memory indications
The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the
rocker switch ⇒ page 66, fig. 43 ⇒ page 66 on the windscreen wiper
lever or by pressing button or ⇒ page 66, fig. 44 on the multifunction
steering wheel*.
• Duration
• Current fuel consumption
• Average fuel consumption
• Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
•
Distance
• Average speed
• Digital display of speed
8)
• Speed warning to --- km/h
Personal selection of display
The driver can establish which displays are shown on the dash panel display
as required:
• Select the submenu Multifunction Display Data from the Configuration
menu ⇒ page 72.
• The displays can be activated or deactivated individually by marking the
required option and pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or
the multifunction steering wheel*.
Duration in h and min
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Current fuel consumption in l/100 km or l/h
The display will show the current fuel consumption in mpg whilst the vehicle
is in motion or in litres/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position with
the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 155.
Average consumption in l/100 km
The average fuel consumption will be shown after a distance of approximately
100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that
time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in
motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
Fuel range in km
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
8)
It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.
A
A OK
A
B
OK
Leon_EN.book Seite 70 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 71
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Distance travelled in km
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Average speed in km/h
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.
The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
Digital display of speed
The dash panel display gives the speed in digital format
8)
.
Speed warning to --- km/h
This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*
to select the current speed. The dash panel display gives the selected speed,
for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset the
speed between 30 km/hand 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons
or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait five
seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set
speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is
displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored
speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed
warning --- km/h is now displayed on the dash panel.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin ranges from -40°C (-40°F) to +50°C (+125°F). At
outside temperatures below +4°C (+39.2°F), “a snowflake symbol” (ice
warning) appears in addition to the outside temperature display. This symbol
flashes for a few seconds and remains lit until the outside temperature rises
above +6°C (+42.8°F).
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol”
is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
• There are different instrument panels; therefore the multifunction display
may vary.
• When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the
temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient
temperature as a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
• Vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel* do not have buttons on the
windscreen wiper lever. The multifunction display can only be controlled from
the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel*.
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
– Select the option Vehicle status from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button on the windscreen wiper lever
⇒ page 68, fig. 45. or
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 66, fig. 44 until the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: “Information and warning
messages on the screen” will automatically disappear from the screen after a
time and will be stored in the Vehicle status menu.
OK
A
A
A
B
OK
OK
OK
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 71 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit72
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no
warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.
If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 66
Note
If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-
tions.
Open Configuration menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button ⇒ page 66, fig. 43 on the wind-
screen wiper lever. or
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 66, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 66
Note
• For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Displayed on the screen Function
Multifunction display
data
This menu is used to establish the data in the
multifunction display menu to be displayed on
the dash panel ⇒ page 69
Convenience This menu allows you to make the settings for
the convenience functions in the vehicle.
OK
A
A
Lights and visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi-
cle lighting settings.
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the navi-
gation system can be changed. Choose between
12 or 24-hour format and change to summer
time.
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which
an optical and acoustic warning will be given by
the system. You can use this function, for exam-
ple, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not
suited for the top speed of your vehicle. Please
see the section “Wheels and tyres”.
Settings: Language The display texts and the navigation system texts
can be seen in different languages.
Units This option allows you to select the units for dis-
playing temperature, fuel consumption values
and distances.
Aux. speed The dash panel also displays the speed in
another different unit of measurement (mph or
km/h) to that given on the speedometer.
Inter Service Consult service messages and reset service inter-
val display here.
Manufacturer's settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the
functions of this menu are restored.
Back
a)
This returns to the main menu
a)
Only of the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFD).
Leon_EN.book Seite 72 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 73
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the
existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.
• The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-
ience settings.
Open menu Convenience
– Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button ⇒ page 66, fig. 43on the windscreen wiper
lever.
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 66, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
– Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 66
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
OK
A
A
A
A
Displayed on the
screen
Function
Open door One door: Individual unlocking activated.
Auto. locking: the doors are automatically locked
when the vehicle is travelling at more than approx
15 km/h.
Auto unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key
is removed from the ignition.
Elec. window control Opening and closing electric windows: this deter-
mines whether to open or close all the windows
when the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open
function can also be activated for the driver's door
only.
Wing mirror adjust. If synchronised adjustment is selected, when the
driver's side wing mirror is adjusted, the passen-
ger wing mirror is also moved.
Manufacturer's set-
tings
The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Leon_EN.book Seite 73 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit74
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button ⇒ page 66 on the windscreen
wiper lever. or
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 66, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
– Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 66
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Displayed on the
screen
Function
Coming Home/
Leaving Home
This option permits the adjustment of the time
during which the headlamps remain lit after the
vehicle is locked, and also permits the function to
be connected and disconnected
Indicator conf. The comfort indicator function can be activated or
deactivated here. With the comfort mode acti-
vated, the indicator will blink at least three times
when turned on.
Manufacturer's set-
tings
The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
OK
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 74 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 75
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 48 Dash panel with warning lamps. Some of the
items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
Leon_EN.book Seite 75 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit76
WARNING
• Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Item Symbol
Meaning of warning
and control lamps
Further
information
Fuel level / reserve ⇒ page 77
Coolant level / coolant temperature ⇒ page 77
Rear fog light switched on ⇒ page 78
Turn signals in operation ⇒ page 78
Engine fault (petrol engine) ⇒ page 78
Glow plug system for diesel engine ⇒ page 78
Main beam switched on ⇒ page 79
Pollen accumulation in the diesel
engine particulate filter
⇒ page 79
ABS system fault ⇒ page 79
Windscreen washer fluid level ⇒ page 80
Alternator fault ⇒ page 80
Fasten seat belts! ⇒ page 19
Tyre pressure ⇒ page 80
Airbag or belt tension device system
fault or airbag disabled
⇒ page 27
⇒ page 30
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
A
12
A
13
Bulb defective ⇒ page 82
Parking brake applied
or low brake fluid level or
fault in brake system
⇒ page 81
Engine oil pressure ⇒ page 82
Cruise control system switched on ⇒ page 82
Door open indicator ⇒ page 82
Electromechanical steering ⇒ page 82
Fault in the emission control system ⇒ page 83
If flashing: electronic stabilisation pro-
gramme (ESP) or the TCS is working or
deactivated
If it remains lit: ESP malfunction or off
⇒ page 83
⇒ page 156
Automatic selector lever lock (auto-
matic gearbox)
⇒ page 84
SAFE Electronic immobiliser ⇒ page 84
Item Symbol
Meaning of warning
and control lamps
Further
information
A
14
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
18
A
19
A
20
A
21
A
22
Leon_EN.book Seite 76 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 77
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to
prevent danger to thirds.
• The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other kind of injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings
⇒ page 215.
Note
• The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
• In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear on the screen.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank under the
reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible
warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity ⇒ page 208.
The dash panel displays the following message
9)
: PLEASE REFUEL!.
Coolant Level* / temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
• The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
three acoustic warning signals ⇒ are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The dash panel displays the following message
10)
: CHECK COOLANT
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL ⇒ page 222.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle,
switch the engine off and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary ⇒ page 249.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
The dash panel displays the following message
11)
: STOP CHECK COOLANT
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
9)
Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
10)
Depending on the version of the model.
11)
Depending on the version of the model.
Leon_EN.book Seite 77 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit78
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ⇒ .
WARNING
• If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a
safe distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and
place the warning triangle.
• Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
• The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any
work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool
down. Always note the corresponding warnings ⇒ page 215.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . For
further information ⇒ page 111.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flashes when the indicators are in opera-
tion.
Depending on which indicator is operating, either the left or right indi-
cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the
hazard warning lights are switched on.
If any of both indicators fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice faster
than normal.
Further information on the indicators ⇒ page 118.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Glow plug system / Engine fault
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp
lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp
flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug lamp will flash
. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Leon_EN.book Seite 78 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 79
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the
headlight flasher is operating.
Further information ⇒ page 118.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter
If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the
appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S
gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately
2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When
cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.
If the indicator
is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to repair the fault.
WARNING
• Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and
traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres
in surrounding traffic.
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
• The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
• The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the ⇒ page 181.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp
lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system ⇒ .
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 215, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp
, stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 227, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has
dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident.
Obtain technical assistance.
• If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have
been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
Leon_EN.book Seite 79 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit80
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
⇒ page 224
The following message is shown on the dash panel display*
12)
: REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp
lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure control system controls the tyre speed and
the frequency spectrum of each tyre.
The tyre monitor
13)
compares wheel revolutions and with this information,
the diameter of each wheel using the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel
changes, the tyre monitor indicator lights . The wheel diameter changes
when:
• Tyre pressure is insufficient.
• The tyre structure is damaged.
• The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
• The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with
a trailer or on extreme slopes).
• The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
• The emergency wheel is fitted.
12)
Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
13)
Depending on the model version
Fig. 49 Centre console:
tyre monitor system
button
Leon_EN.book Seite 80 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 81
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more
wheels, the button ⇒ page 80, fig. 49 must be kept pressed while the igni-
tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator
lights up
If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by
the driver, then the tyre control warning lamp lights up ⇒ .
The tyre pressure monitor indicator
flashes
If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest
specialist workshop.
WARNING
• When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and
avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check
the tyre pressure and status.
• The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre
pressure must be regularly checked.
• Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in
winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or
function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights up after turning
the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Brake system* / handbrake
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the
brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake
system.
This warning lamp lights up if
• If the handbrake is on.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following message
will appear on the dash panel display
14)
: HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an audible
warning is given.
• If the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 227.
The dash panel displays the following message
14)
: STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• If there is a fault in the brake system.
The dash panel displays the following message
14)
: BRAKE SYSTEM FAULT
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system
warning lamp.
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 215.
• If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when
driving, the brake fluid level ⇒ page 227, “Brake fluid” in the reservoir is
too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
nical assistance.
14)
Depending on the version of the model.
Leon_EN.book Seite 81 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit82
• If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp
, the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the
rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The dash panel displays the following message
15)
: LEFT FULL BEAM
FAULTY.
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible
warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil ⇒ page 218.
The dash panel displays the following message
16)
: STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.
Further notes on the cruise control system ⇒ page 176.
Indicator for open doors or tailgate*
This indicator lights if one of the doors or the tailgate is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off
approx. 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
Power steering system*
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on
the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle.
15)
Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
16)
Depending on the version of the model.
Leon_EN.book Seite 82 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit 83
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear
in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a
minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no
assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you
will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the
steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.
For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function “Recommended steering
manoeuvre” is included. See ⇒ page 183.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the
engine checked.
The dash panel displays the following message
17)
: EXHAUST GAS SEE
WORKSHOP.
Warning lamp
is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
The following information text displayed in the dash panel display : EXHAUST
GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation
programme.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake
assist system (BAS), automatic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer
stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp
has the following functions:
• It will light for about 2 seconds when the ignition is switched on while a
test of the function is carried out.
• It flashes when the ESP is activated when driving.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp
lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully func-
tional.
If the ESP button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning
lamp flashes.
17)
Depending on the version of the model.
Leon_EN.book Seite 83 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cockpit84
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL ⇒ page 184, “Electronic differential lock (EDL)*”.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see ⇒ page 181,
“Brakes”
If the TCS button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning
lamp remains lit.
By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
Operating the foot brake
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Electronic immobiliser* “Safe”
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
lock.
The dash panel displays the following message
18)
: SAFE. The vehicle cannot
be used in that case ⇒ page 158.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
18)
Depending on the version of the model.
Leon_EN.book Seite 84 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls 85
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Steering wheel controls
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-
matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
• Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
• Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and
the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD
mp3, CD Changer) and the radio / navigation System, in which case they also
control the Navigation system.
• Version for automatic gearbox* ⇒ page 169.
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 50 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 51 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Leon_EN.book Seite 85 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls86
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up
Volume up Volume up
Volume down
Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No specified function
Search for last station
Last track
Hold down:Rewind
No function specified
No function specified
No function specified No function specified
Silence Pause
Silence
a)
a)
Depending on the model version
Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display
Next preset
b)
b)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
Next track
b)
No function specified
b)
a)
Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display
Previous preset
b)
Previous track
b)
No function specified
b)
a)
Next preset Change folder No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
a)
Previous preset Change folder No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a)
Change source Change source Change source
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
A
I
A
J
A
K
A
L
Leon_EN.book Seite 86 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls 87
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 52 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 53 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No function specified No function specified
Search for last station
Last track
Hold down:Rewind
No function specified No function specified
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instru-
ment panel
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
Leon_EN.book Seite 87 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls88
Next preset
a)
Next track
a)
No function specified
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
Previous preset
a)
Previous track
a)
No function specified
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Confirm
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-
PLAY menu
a)
Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.
A
G
A
H
A
I
A
J
A
K
A
L
Leon_EN.book Seite 88 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 54 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 55 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No function specified No function specified
Search for last station
Last track
Hold down:Rewind
No function specified No function specified
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instru-
ment panel
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
No function specified
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
Leon_EN.book Seite 89 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls90
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Next preset
a)
Next track
a)
No function specified Operates on instrument panel
Previous preset
a)
Previous track
a)
No function specified Operates on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
No function specified
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
A
G
A
H
A
I
A
J
A
K
A
L
Fig. 56 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 57 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Leon_EN.book Seite 90 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No function specified No function specified No function specified
Search for last station
Last track
Hold down:Rewind
No function specified No function specified No function specified
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Access telephone menu
on instrument panel
No function specified
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incom-
ing call
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition
Enable voice recogni-
tion
Enable voice recognition
Next preset
a)
Next track
a)
No function specified
Operates on instrument
panel
Movement on telephone
menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed
calls
Previous preset
a)
Previous track
a)
No function specified
Operates on instrument
panel
Movement on telephone
menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed
calls
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
No function specified
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
A
I
Leon_EN.book Seite 91 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Steering wheel controls92
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
No function specified
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Confirm
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Return to MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY menu
a)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
A
J
A
K
A
L
Leon_EN.book Seite 92 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Basic functions
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
doors with just pushing on the key button.
Description
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
• the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating it manu-
ally,
• the central locking button in the passenger compartment as an electronic
control ⇒ page 96.
• the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
⇒ page 100.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
– Locking system “Safe”
– Selective unlocking system*
– Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
– Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
– Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
–Press button ⇒ page 100, fig. 63 on remote control to unlock all the
doors and tailgate.
Locking the vehicle*
– Press button ⇒ page 100, fig. 63 on the remote control to lock all
doors and the tailgate or turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the
tailgate.
WARNING
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer-
gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
own.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors
when you are not using the vehicle.
• Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse
of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and
accident.
− The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
− If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti-
vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
− The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could
make assistance difficult in an emergency.
− Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The
steering lock could suddenly engage, and you would not be able to steer
the vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 93 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking94
Note
• While the driver's door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the
remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
• If the driver's door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver's door is
unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched
on, the door "safe" deadlock is deactivated (although the doors remain
locked) and the central locking button is activated. See ⇒ page 102.
• If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver's door
warning lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.
• For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system “Safe*”
The "safe" deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the
vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking
button are not active (depending upon country).
Activating deadlock
–Press once the locking button on the remote control. or
–Turn the key once in the driver's door lock to lock. A warning lamp
in the driver door flashes to indicate the "safe" deadlock is
working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at
short intervals and then more slowly.
Deactivating deadlock when the vehicle is locked
–Press twice the locking button on the remote control within
two seconds. The vehicle is locked without activating the dead-
lock. The driver's door warning lamp flashes for approx. two
seconds and then goes out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts
flashing again.
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside if the "safe" deadlock
has not been activated. You will have to pull the door release lever once.
When the "safe" deadlock is off, the antitheft alarm* ⇒ page 102 remains
active. The vehicle interior monitoring system* and the anti-tow system are
deactivated*.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech-
anism has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the
inside. Locked doors could make it more difficult to assist vehicle occu-
pants in the event of an accident. People could become trapped inside in an
emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows to unlock either just the driver's door or all
the vehicle.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The
“Safe” system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the driver's door is
unlocked and both the alarm and the light indicator are also turned off.
Leon_EN.book Seite 94 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Unlocking all doors and the boot
The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors
and the boot can be opened.
Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the “Safe” system for all vehicle,
to unlock all doors and to use the boot. The indicator and the alarm (only vehi-
cles fitted with one) are turned off.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle
from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will
be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the
door would open.
Automatic locking system for involuntary unlocking*
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unintentional
unlocking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and any of the doors (including the tailgate) are
opened within 30 seconds, it gets re-locked automatically. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed
by mistake.
Emergency unlocking system
If the airbags are triggered during an accident, the vehicle gets unlocked,
except for the boot. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside with the
central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on again.
If the doors must be locked from the outside, see “Emergency locking of the
doors”
Leon_EN.book Seite 95 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking96
Central locking button
The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle from the inside.
Locking the vehicle
–Press the button ⇒ .
Unlocking the doors
–Press button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking
button:
• Safety reasons make not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate
from the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).
• The driver or front passenger door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle
doors (except the tailgate) are open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
key inside the vehicle.
• Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central
locking button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button may be
used once more.
• There is a danger of leaving the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is
locked by the central locking button when the driver's door is closed and any
of the rear doors open. On closing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and
the keys remain inside it.
• All doors can be locked separately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
the door release lever once.
WARNING
• If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside it.
• The central locking button is not operative in the following cases:
• When the vehicle is locked from the outside (by the remote or the key).
• While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
with the key.
Note
• Vehicle locked, button amber colour
• Vehicle unlocked, button red
Unlocking and locking - Manual personalisation
Activating selective unlocking
With the driver's door open, turn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s.
Fig. 58 Detail of the
centre console: central
locking system button
Leon_EN.book Seite 96 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Deactivating selective unlocking
With the driver's door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s.
The indicator lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.
Activation of automatic locking
Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
Deactivation of automatic locking
Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver's door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
the left hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap ⇒ fig. 59 printed with a lock image.
This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right hand side doors
and anticlockwise for the left hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can no
longer be opened from the outside.
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door
handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver's door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
the internal door handle for the required door. If the child safety lock is acti-
vated on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the
door is unlocked but does not open. The exterior door handle may now be
used to open the door.
Note
Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
repeat the previous instructions.
Fig. 59 Locking the doors
manually
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 97 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking98
Childproof lock
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from
opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and
locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated
and deactivated manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door in which you wish to activate
the childproof lock.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the right hand side doors ⇒ fig. 60 ⇒ fig. 61.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door whose childproof lock you want
to deactivate.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the right hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the left hand side doors ⇒ fig. 60 ⇒ fig. 61.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the
outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting the
key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Fig. 60 Child safety lock
on the left hand side door
Fig. 61 Child safety lock
on the right hand side
door
Leon_EN.book Seite 98 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a plastic key tab*.
The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
• one remote control key ⇒ fig. 62 with folding key bit,
• a key without remote control ,
• a plastic key tab* .
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
Centre.
WARNING
• An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer-
gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
own.
• An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could make assist-
ance difficult in an emergency.
• Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your
vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion.
Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible
to steer the vehicle.
Caution
There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and
hitting the keys.
Fig. 62 Set of keys
A
A
A
B
A
C
Leon_EN.book Seite 99 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking100
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle
from a distance.
Using the button ⇒ fig. 63 (arrow) on the control, the key shaft is released.
Unlocking the vehicle ⇒ fig. 63 . The doors and the tailgate are
unlocked.
Locking the vehicle ⇒ fig. 63 .
Unlocking the tailgate. Press the button ⇒ fig. 63 until all indicators
on the vehicle briefly flash. When the unlocking button is pressed,
you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
once more.
Also, the battery indicator on the key ⇒ fig. 63, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
receiver is inside the vehicle. The maximum scope of the remote control
depends on various conditions. This scope is reduced when the batteries
start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button is pressed once the driver's door is unlocked, all
others remain locked.
Fig. 63 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
Fig. 64 Range of the
remote control:
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 100 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Press the button twice to unlock all doors.
WARNING
• An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer-
gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
own.
• Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in
serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the
key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could
complicate the aid in case of emergency.
Note
• The radio-frequency remote control can be programmed by means of
pressing the unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will
unlock. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will
be unlocked.
• The remote control functions only when you are in range ⇒ page 100,
fig. 64 (red area).
• If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-
matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds
after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked
if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.
• If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised ⇒ page 101.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the
battery must be replaced.
Caution
The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote
control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
The flat batteries must be thrown away in accordance with regulations
governing the protection of the environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door with the remote
control, it should be re-synchronised.
–Press the ⇒ page 100, fig. 63 button on the remote control.
– Then close the vehicle using the key bit within one minute.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the
remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside the radio
frequency remote control effective scope. The remote control key will have to
be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available in your Authorised Service Centres,
where they must be matched to the locking system.
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
A
1
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 101 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking102
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the key,
or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the
vehicle. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the car is locked:
• Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
• Opening a door
• Opening the bonnet
• Opening the tailgate
• Switching on the ignition
• Movements in the vehicle
• Undue manipulation of the alarm
• Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.
This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
car. This is done as follows:
• Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow).
• Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately.
• Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
the anti-theft alarm system. If you do not switch on the ignition within 15
seconds, the alarm is triggered.
How to switch the alarm off
When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the remote control
or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
Note
• If, after the alarm goes off, access is gained to a second secured zone
(e.g. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the warning signal
is triggered again.
• Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
• The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is active.
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm* which detects unauthorized vehicle entry by means of
ultrasound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Leon_EN.book Seite 102 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Activation
– It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
– Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
• The “safe” security system remains deactivated if the volumetric
sensor is deactivated.
• For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the
passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter-
ference with the sensor.
Note
• If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
Leon_EN.book Seite 103 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking104
Tailgate
Unlocking and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
– Pull on the release lever and lift the tailgate ⇒ fig. 65. The tail-
gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
– Grip the tailgate by one of the two handles on the interior lining
and close it, using a light movement.
The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
then the opening system is operative and the boot may be opened.
To the locking / unlocking status, press the button or the button on
the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instrument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
erly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the tailgate is opened while
the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h.*
Fig. 65 Tailgate: opening
from the outside
Fig. 66 Detail of the
inside of the tailgate:
hand grip
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 104 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
• Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
• The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are
lit. This may damage the lighting units.
• Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear
window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex-
pectedly while driving.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors
when you are not using the vehicle.
• Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could
cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in
the path of the tailgate.
• Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may
penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
• If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle
will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking
does not operate (for example, if the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the boot allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from inside the luggage compartment
– Insert the key bit in the groove and unlock the locking system,
turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow
⇒ fig. 67.
Fig. 67 Tailgate: emer-
gency open
Leon_EN.book Seite 105 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking106
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using
the controls on the driver's door.
Opening and closing the windows
– Press the button to open a window.
– Pull button to close a window ⇒ .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
⇒ .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver's door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch
*
Safety switch on the driver's door can be used to disable the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of a window.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the
engine or activate any electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing
risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This
could make assistance difficult in an emergency.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
• If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows.
Make sure that they have been disabled.
Fig. 68 Detail of driver
door: controls for the front
and rear windows
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 106 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again ⇒ page 107. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
– Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
– Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Reset the automatic closing function for the front side windows and
the automatic opening for all windows
– Close all windows.
– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons ⇒ page 106, fig. 68 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off,
even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
• If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately ⇒ .
• If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
normal automatic function resumes.
• If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point.
• If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within five seconds.
If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you
operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 107 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking108
• Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left
alone inside the vehicle.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of a window.
• Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle
from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
⇒ page 108.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
All windows which function electrically will be either opened or
closed.
– Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– Once the windows are completely closed, the indicators will
flash.
Sliding/tilting roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the
rotary button when the ignition is switched on.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 69 Roof lining
description: rotary sun
roof control / deflector
Leon_EN.book Seite 108 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position ⇒ fig. 69 ⇒ .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
– To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended ⇒ .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
• Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring
it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others.
Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using the
remote control key. This could make assistance difficult in an emergency.
• The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front
doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's door in the locking
position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– When the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed completely, the indi-
cators flash once.
Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 109 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Unlocking and locking110
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*
The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects
getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not
prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function, it
can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in position
⇒ fig. 70 until the sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. Please note that the
sunroof will now close without the roll-back function.
Operation in the event of a breakdown
In case of a breakdown, the sunroof can be closed manually.
• Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
• Remove the lever from the cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
as possible (pushing against the spring) and close the sliding roof.
• Fit the lever back into position.
Fig. 70 Roof lining
description: rotary sun
roof control / deflector
Fig. 71 Emergency
closing handle
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 110 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 111
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 72 to position
.
Switching on dipped headlights
– Turn the light switch to position
.
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog lights*
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the first stop. The
symbol
in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the second stop
⇒ . A warning lamp lights up in the dash panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
– Pull the light switch from position
to the last stop. A warning
lamp lights up in the dash panel.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are
not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side
lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
• If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
a buzzer will sound while the driver door remains open. This is a reminder to
switch the lights off.
Fig. 72 Detailed view of
instrument panel: lights,
fog light and rear fog light
control
Leon_EN.book Seite 111 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility112
• The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
• If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
• Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and rear
lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on
the life expectancy of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when
they are switched on.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
– Rotate the switch to the position “Auto”, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
– Turn the light switch to 0.
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped headlights are automat-
ically switched on by a light-sensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
example.
The motorway function switches on the dipped headlights when the vehicle
is driven at over 140 km/h for a few seconds and it switches the lights off
when the vehicle is driven at less than 65 km/h for a few minutes.
The rain sensor switches on the dipped headlights when the windscreen
wipers have been operating continuously for a few seconds and it switches
the lights off when the continuous or intermittent wipe is switched off for
some minutes ⇒ page 123.
When the automatic dipped light control is connected but the dipped lights
are off, the warning lamp
lights up on the light control ⇒ fig. 73. If the
automatic control switches on the dipped lights, the instrument and control
lighting is also switched on.
WARNING
• If automatic headlight control is switched on, the headlights will not be
switched on in fog or heavy rain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be
switched on manually.
Note
• For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is
removed from the ignition, the acoustic signal will only sound if the light
control is in the position
or if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
home function.
Fig. 73 Automatic
lighting
Leon_EN.book Seite 112 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 113
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
• To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go
off when the tailgate is opened (according to country).
Daytime lights*
The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing
the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are
enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is
automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.
Daytime lights (halogen lamps)
19)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.
These include the dipped, side and registration plate lights.
The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the
light setting is in position 0 or
. Depending upon the model, a control
lamp
on the light control switch or the lighting up of the dash panel will
indicate that the daytime lighting is on.
It is not possible for the driver to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please
contact a qualified workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.
Daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.
The lights are built-in separately to the headlights and are switched on each
time the ignition is turned on if the light setting is in position 0 or
.
Automatic control of the dipped light in combination with the daytime
lighting (bi-xenon headlamps)
If the dipped light control and the daytime lighting are activated at the same
time, the dipped lights and the instrument panel lighting will automatically
come on as required (e.g. on entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go
off. When the automatic dipped light control switches off the dipped lights
(e.g. on coming out of the tunnel), the daytime lights come back on.
Activating the daytime lights
With the ignition switched off, move the indicator and main beam lever
upwards and back (left indicator and headlamp flash).
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds while holding this position. The daytime
lights are activated and can be switched on.
Deactivating the daytime lights
With the ignition switched off, move the indicator and main beam lever
upwards and back (left indicator and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-
tion.
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds while holding this position. The daytime
lights are deactivated and can not be switched on.
Deactivating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
With the ignition switched off, move the indicator and main beam lever
upwards and back (left indicator and headlamp flash).
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds. The daytime lights are deactivated and
can not be switched on.
19)
It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra
Leon_EN.book Seite 113 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility114
Activating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
With the ignition switched off, move the indicator and main beam lever
upwards and back (left indicator and headlamp flash).
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds. The daytime lights are activated and can
be switched on.
Note
Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Coming/leaving home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The
Leaving Home function is controlled with a photo sensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the registration plate light will light up
to provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver's door is opened, the Coming
Home lighting comes on. If the driver's door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
• On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off
the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.
• If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain
open.
• If the light switch is turned to position .
• If the ignition is switched on.
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
• the light control is in position and
• the photo sensor detects “darkness”.
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
• If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlamps has ended
• If the vehicle is locked again.
• If the light switch is turned to position .
• If the ignition is switched on.
Note
The setting for the delay in switching off the headlamps in the Coming Home
and Leaving Home function can be changed or the function can be connected
or disconnected in the menu Lights and visibility ⇒ page 74.
• If the ignition key is removed while the lights are on, and the lights are
flashed briefly and the driver's door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as
when the Coming Home function is on, the lights are automatically switched
off after a period of time (except when the light switch is in position
or
.
Leon_EN.book Seite 114 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 115
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel ⇒ fig. 74 .
The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination
and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a light sensor incorpo-
rated in the dash panel.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition
is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the
ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver
to switch on the dipped-beam headlights in good time when light conditions
become poor.
Headlight range control
By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is
possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same
time, by using the correct headlight settings, the driver has the best possible
lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon lamps”) are equipped with
dynamic headlight range control. This means that the headlights will be
adjusted to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when
pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for.
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps do not have headlight range control.
Adaptive headlights* (for driving through bends)
When driving around bends, the headlights will light the
most important areas of the road.
Fig. 74 Instrument panel:
regulation for instrument
and switch illumination
and headlight range
control
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
2
Fig. 75 Cornering
lighting using self-direc-
tional headlights
Leon_EN.book Seite 115 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility116
Dynamic curve lights (AFS)
The dynamic curve lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more than
10 km/h and the dipped headlamps are on. When taking a bend, the road is
illuminated better with directional gas discharge lamps than with conven-
tional fixed headlamps.
A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp
on the
dash panel. At the same time, a text message with information or instructions
to perform necessary operations may appear on the dash panel display. Take
the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault repaired.
If the control lamp
lights up on the dash panel but all the lamps are oper-
ating correctly ⇒ page 254, there may still be a fault in the dynamic curve
lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the
fault repaired.
WARNING
If the “automatic dipped light control” is switched on, the dipped head-
lights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually
using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct
use of lights in all situations. “Automatic headlight control” is merely a
system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manu-
ally using the light switch.
Fog lights with cornering function*
When the indicator is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right or
left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a cornering light. The
cornering light only operates if the dipped lights are on.
WARNING
If the “automatic dipped light control” is switched on, the dipped head-
lights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually
using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct
use of lights in all situations. “Automatic headlight control” is merely a
system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manu-
ally using the light switch.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
Fig. 76 Instrument panel:
switch for hazard warning
lights
Leon_EN.book Seite 116 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 117
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights ⇒ .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for
instance when:
• reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
• there is an emergency
• your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
• you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps
and the
indicator lamp in the switch
will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Emergency braking function
When the vehicle detects sudden braking, the hazard warning lights auto-
matically come on to warn vehicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off
when the vehicle accelerates or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.
WARNING
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention
of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Note
• The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
• The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Leon_EN.book Seite 117 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility118
Indicator and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up ⇒ fig. 77 to indicate right, and
all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
– Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
– Turn the light switch to position
.
–Press the lever forward ⇒ fig. 77 to switch on the main
beams.
– Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flashers
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
– Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.
– Move the lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking
lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
• The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp
or flashes on the dash panel. The warning lamp
flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is correctly
attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the
warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are
damaged, warning lamp
does not light up. Change the bulb.
Fig. 77 Indicator and
main beam headlight
lever
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 118 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 119
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp
then lights up on the dash
panel.
• The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp
then lights up on the
dash panel.
• When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
• If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light
The switch ⇒ fig. 78 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition lock And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-
rior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O ⇒ fig. 78.
Fig. 78 Interior roof trim:
front interior lights
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 119 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility120
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light
Press the button to switch on the reading light.
Switching the reading lights off
Press the button to switch off the reading light.
Rear interior and reading lights*
The switch ⇒ fig. 80 is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position ⇒ fig. 80 , the interior and reading lights are switched
off.
Switching on the reading light
Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched
on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock The
light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are
switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim:
front lights
A
B
A
B
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim:
rear interior lights and
reading lights.
A
C
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
3
A
5
Leon_EN.book Seite 120 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 121
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their
mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors ⇒ fig. 81
.
The make-up mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover
a light* in the roof turns on.
The lamp* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note
The roof lamp* will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the
ignition key. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 82 has the following positions:
Fig. 81 Sun visor on the
driver side
A
1
A
2
Fig. 82 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever
Leon_EN.book Seite 121 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility122
Switching off the wipers
– Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
– Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the
intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:
short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch
.
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Brief wipe
– Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a brief
wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the lever
pressed down for longer than 2 seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash
function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a
slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the
same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.
– Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximately
four seconds.
Optional heated windscreen in the wiper blade* area (page
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the rear heating
window key
.
WARNING
• Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
• In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system.
The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
your view of the road.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 225.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
• In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
• When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to the 0 position, they move to the rest position.
• The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed
⇒ page 121, fig. 82 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed
will be resumed when the vehicle starts again
• The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated, provided the vehicle
A
0
A
1
A
A
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 122 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 123
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three seconds
after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.
For the “drip” function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
• When the “intermittent wipe function” is on, the intervals are directly
proportional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter
the intervals.
• The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
• Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the
windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
• The heat output of the heated jets is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Fig. 83 Rain sensor*
Fig. 84 Windscreen wiper
lever
Leon_EN.book Seite 123 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility124
Switching on the rain sensor
– Move the windscreen wiper lever into position ⇒ page 123,
fig. 84.
– Move the control to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
rain sensor. Control to the right: highly sensitive. Control to the
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch
the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
the wiper intermittent function off and back on.
Note
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause sensor disruption or faults.
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
– Press the lever forwards to position ⇒ fig. 85. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
– Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
A
1
A
A
Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever: rear window wiper
A
6
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 124 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 125
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system
– Press the lever fully forwards to position ⇒ page 124, fig. 85.
The wash function will start immediately and the wiper will start
with a slight delay. The windscreen wash system will function as
long as you hold the lever in this position.
– Release the lever. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4
seconds, and then in intervals again.
– Release the lever. The washer system stops and the wipers func-
tion.
WARNING
• A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 225, “Changing
the front windscreen wiper blades”.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the wiper blade
and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on
and the tailgate is closed.
• In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
screen wiper will make one wipe.
Headlight washer system*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds – provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
• To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
• To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
A
7
Leon_EN.book Seite 125 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility126
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off
as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle function
–Press button ⇒ fig. 86. Warning lamp goes out:
Switching on anti-dazzle function
–Press button ⇒ fig. 86. Warning lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is activated the interior mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it receives (for example from the
headlights of a vehicle behind). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if
reverse gear is engaged.
Note
• The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
• If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ⇒ fig. 87 to position L (left exterior mirror).
Fig. 86 Automatic anti-
dazzle interior mirror.
A
A
A
B
A
A
Fig. 87 Controls of exte-
rior mirrors
Leon_EN.book Seite 126 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility 127
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the car ⇒ .
Heating the exterior mirrors*
– Turn the knob forwards to the central position ⇒ page 126,
fig. 87 so that the heated rear view mirrors warm up and the
heated windscreen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated
⇒ page 122.
– The wing mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above
approximately 20°C.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
–Turn the control ⇒ page 126, fig. 87 to position
to fold in the
exterior mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if
you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help
prevent damage.
Folding rear view mirrors with convenience control*
– The outer rear view mirror will fold back automatically with
convenience closing (with the remote or the key).
– To unfold it again, open the door and use the contact.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
– Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back
out ⇒ .
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
• The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision
however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when
changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
• If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles
behind you.
• Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note
• If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
• In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 127 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Lights and visibility128
• The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
• The fold-in function on the wing mirrors is not activated at speeds of
above 40 km/h.
Leon_EN.book Seite 128 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 129
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to
suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
• a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
• a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
• a safe driving ⇒ page 7,
• ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-
tion ⇒ page 19.
WARNING
• If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they
may sustain critical injuries.
• More people than available seats must never be transported in your
vehicle.
• Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system ⇒ page 44, “Child safety”.
• The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body
size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and
your passengers with optimum protection.
• Always keep your feet on the foot well when the vehicle is moving;
never rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This
is also applied to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to
an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the
airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect
sitting position.
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the
minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal
injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or between
the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great as
possible.
• Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is
stationary. Otherwise, your seat could move unexpectedly while the
vehicle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore,
injury. In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect
sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.
• Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front
passenger seat. When installing a child seat, observe the warning note in
the ⇒ page 44, “Child safety”.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 129 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage130
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at minimum, at eye level
⇒ fig. 88 and ⇒ fig. 89.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 131.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the
passenger's height.
Fig. 88 Front view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Fig. 89 Side view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Leon_EN.book Seite 130 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 131
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its
positions ⇒ page 14.
Angle adjustment (front seats)
– Press the head restraint forward or back to the required position.
Removing the head restraint
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 90 (arrow).
– Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint into the guides on the rear backrest.
– Push head restraint down.
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size ⇒ page 14 and
⇒ page 13.
WARNING
• Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
• Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there is
a risk of serious injury.
• After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for
height to achieve optimal protection.
• Please observe the safety warnings ⇒ page 130, “Correct adjustment
of head restraints”.
Fig. 90 Adjusting and
removing the head
restraints
Leon_EN.book Seite 131 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage132
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in ⇒ fig. 91 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
– Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
– Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
– Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Adjusting the lumbar support*
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to
adjust the lumbar support.
The backrest curvature of the cushioned area is determined by the settings
made in the lumbar region. This supports the natural curvature of the spine
very effectively.
WARNING
• Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
only when the vehicle is stationary.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of
a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted
towards the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved
only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front
passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the back-
rests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper
positioning of the belt web!
• Exercise caution when securing the seat height into forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted
without due care and attention.
Fig. 91 Front left seat
controls
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 132 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 133
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Front seat heating for vehicles without Climatronic
– Turn the appropriate thumb wheel ⇒ fig. 92 to switch on the seat
heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
Front seat heating for vehicles with Climatronic
– Press button to switch on the seat heating.
– Press once to set seat heating at maximum level (level 3).
– Press twice to set seat heating at medium level (level 2).
– Press three times to set seat heating at minimum level (level 1).
– When the button is pressed four times, the heating goes off and
the LED goes out (level 0).
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
Caution
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Fig. 92 Thumb wheel for
the front seat heating
Fig. 93 Front seat
heating with Climatronic
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 133 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage134
Rear seat bench
Fold down the seat back
– Pull the release button on the backrest (sectioned backrest)
forwards in the direction of the arrow.
– Fold down the backrest. You might have to remove the rear head
restraints before folding the seat forwards if the front seats have
been moved too far back ⇒ page 131.
Folding up the seat back
– Fold the backrest back and push the backrest firmly into the lock.
The red marking should no longer be visible ⇒ fig. 95.
WARNING
• Please be careful when raising the backrest! Injuries can be caused if
the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Fig. 94 Folding the seat
backrests down
Fig. 95 Folding up the
rear seat back
Leon_EN.book Seite 134 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 135
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ⇒ fig. 96. On opening,
a lamp* lights up, and on closing, it turns off.
If the glove box remains open inadvertently, on locking the vehicle using the
remote control or the key, the lamp* turns off. If the vehicle is not locked using
the remote control or the key and the glove box remains open, after little time
the lamp* turns off.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in
motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or
by an accident.
The centre console with drinks holder
The centre console has a drinks holder.
Stowage compartment under the left hand side front seat*
There is a stowage locker with a cover under the front left
hand side seat.
The locker* ⇒ fig. 97 is opened by pulling on the cover.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
Fig. 96 Passenger side:
stowage compartment
Fig. 97 Stowage area
under the front seats
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 135 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage136
WARNING
• The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
• Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for
passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be found:
• in the centre console,
• in the side trims of the luggage compartment,
The hooks for hanging are found on the pillar between the front and rear side
windows.
WARNING
• Do not store loose objects on the dashboard. These objects could be
flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g.
while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
accident.
• Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other stowage
areas into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
accelerator. Risk of accident.
• Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view.
Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-
cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging
articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe-
cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the
vehicle occupants.
Front drinks holders
On the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
⇒ fig. 98.
WARNING
• Never place hot drinks in the bottle holder. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
• Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could
cause injury in the case of an accident.
Fig. 98 Front drinks
holder
Leon_EN.book Seite 136 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 137
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
– To open the ashtray, lift the cover ⇒ fig. 99.
– To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
–Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the
ashtray and cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
– Press on the cigarette lighter ⇒ fig. 100 to activate it ⇒ .
– Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the
glowing coil.
WARNING
• Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
a fire.
• Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using the
cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
• The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is
running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the
vehicle.
Fig. 99 Ashtray located
in the front drink holder
Fig. 100 The cigarette
lighter is located in the
electric socket on the
front of the centre console
Leon_EN.book Seite 137 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage138
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt power point in the front
centre console ⇒ fig. 101of the passenger compartment and that of the
boot* The appliances connected to each power point must not exceed a
power rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The current power points and the connected accessories will only operate
when the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the
sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire.
To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.
Note
• The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
• Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions on
⇒ page 206.
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*
– Lift the AUX. cover ⇒ fig. 102.
– Insert the pin as far as possible (see Radio manual).
Fig. 101 Socket, centre
console, front
Fig. 102 Auxiliary audio
connection
Leon_EN.book Seite 138 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 139
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
MEDIA-IN* connector
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire
extinguisher
Warning triangle
The emergency warning triangle can be fitted in the side lining of the boot.
Note
• The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher
The first-aid kit* can be housed in a stowage box in the left side lining of the
luggage compartment.
Fig. 103 Opening
connector on central
console
Fig. 104 Connector on
the central console
Fig. 105 Housing for the
emergency warning
triangle in the boot
Leon_EN.book Seite 139 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage140
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet by
Velcro.
Note
• The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's
standard equipment.
• The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
• Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should
purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
first-aid kit has expired.
• The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
• Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
• Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions on ⇒ page 206.
Boot
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
injuries.
• Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and
change the way the vehicle handles.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the
passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
• Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit-
able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
• When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a
change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
• Please observe information on safe driving ⇒ page 7, “Safe driving”.
Caution
Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note
The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as
this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 140 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage 141
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Luggage compartment cover
Removing the cover
– Unhook the loops ⇒ fig. 106 from housings
– Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest position and pull
outwards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the open stowage compartment,
because they will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden
braking.
Caution
• Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is
correctly fitted.
• An overloaded boot could mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly
seated and it may be bent or damaged.
• If the boot is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note
• Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment
cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
• For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
should be used.
• It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
tion manual. Not following these instructions may damage the bodywork.
• Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
check them at regular intervals.
• Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly
along the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire
roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should
the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on “Technical
Data”.
• When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an
Fig. 106 Stowage tray
A
B
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 141 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Seats and stowage142
increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
• For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
with the load on the roof carrier system when opened.
Leon_EN.book Seite 142 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 143
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating
Controls and equipment
– Using the controls ⇒ fig. 107 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the fan speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperat ure
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Rear window heater
This function will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes
after being switched on. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing
the button.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the outside air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic ⇒ .
Fig. 107 On the dash panel there are the heating
controls
A
1
A
4
A
5
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 143 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning144
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
– Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode
is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air
recirculation mode should not be connected.
– Air distribution to the upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
• For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa-
tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself
with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including
the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
• In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off.
Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long
time (risk of accident).
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 153.
A
4
A
5
Leon_EN.book Seite 144 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 145
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
– Using the controls ⇒ fig. 108 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector ⇒ page 146
Button – Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
⇒ page 146
Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
Button – Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 147
Air distribution control ⇒ page 146
Blower switch. There are four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Fig. 108 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A
1
A
5
A
6
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2 AC
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 145 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning146
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 153.
Heating and cooling the interior
Interior heating
– Turn the temperature selector ⇒ fig. 109 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
– Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
– Switch on the air conditioning using the button ⇒ page 145,
fig. 108 .
– Turn the temperature selector anti-clockwise until the desired
cooling output is reached.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Fig. 109 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A
1
AC
Leon_EN.book Seite 146 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 147
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• The engine may not be running.
• The blower is switched off.
• The outside temperature is below +3°C.
• The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioning fuse is faulty.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
ified workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outside.
Fig. 110 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
Leon_EN.book Seite 147 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning148
Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 147, fig. 110 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the cold air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode
switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Leon_EN.book Seite 148 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 149
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
The air conditioning system controls the temperature when the
engine is running and the blower is switched on.
– Turn the temperature control knobs ⇒ fig. 111 or in order
to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand
side respectively.
– The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the
radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.
Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior.
Button – defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation
mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost function
is switched on. At temperatures over 3°C, the air conditioning system will
be switched on automatically and the blower speed will be increased by
one level in order to dry the air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol
appears on the radio or navigator display.
Button – Upward air distribution
Button – Central air distribution
Button – Downward air distribution
Fig. 111 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
A
9
A
14
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 149 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning150
Button – Manual air recirculation mode.
Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Button – Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control ⇒ page 151
button - Dual zone synchroniser
Button – Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off ⇒ page 152
Blower control ⇒ page 152
button – Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system
on
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 153.
Viewing Climatronic information
Information about the Climatronic system can be displayed
on the radio or radio and navigation screen mounted at
factory.
A
5
A
6
A
7 AUTO
A
8 DUAL
A
9 OFF
A
10
A
11 AC
Fig. 112 Navigation
display with information
about the Climatronic
Fig. 113 Radio display
with information about
Climatronic
Leon_EN.book Seite 150 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 151
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has
been activated.
In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory
briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.
The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same
as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
–Press the ⇒ page 149, fig. 111 button. “AUTO High” is
shown on the radio display (high fan speed).
– Press the button again ⇒ page 149, fig. 111. “AUTO Low”
is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).
Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:
When a temperature of 22°C (72°F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable
interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to
change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or
particular circumstances. The compartment temperature can be set between
+18°C (64°F) and +26°C (80°F). These are approximate temperatures and the
actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient
conditions.
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature. The temperature of the air
supplied to the interior, the blower speed and the air distribution are regu-
lated automatically. The system also considers the sunlight radiation, so
there is no need for manual readjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost
always provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants throughout the
year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for the air distribution, air flow or or the air recirculation button
. The temperature will continue to be regulated within the parameters
manually selected by the user.
Note
There are two automatic modes:
• Automatic mode LO: This calculates the air flow for two people.
• Automatic mode HI: This calculates the air flow for more than two
people.
AUTO
AUTO
Leon_EN.book Seite 151 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning152
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
– To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons ⇒ fig. 114 to
or press the air flow control . The selected function is
shown on the radio or navigator display.
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.
The compartment temperature can be set between +18°C (64°F) and +26°C
(80°F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may
be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 18°C (64°F) is selected, the display switches to LO In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 26°C (80°F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted freely using the control . Always have the
blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
vehicle. Pushing the button
to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning system on and off
When the button is on (LED lit), the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system is on.
Fig. 114 On the instrument panel: 2C Climatronic
controls.
A
1
A
5
A
10
A
10
AC
Leon_EN.book Seite 152 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system is off.
When the button is off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning
system is switched off to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-
late. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the
ambient temperature.
Driver and passenger temperature control
The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate
zones.
When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22°C and passenger side
temperature 23°C.
When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22°C and passenger side
temperature 22°C.
If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the
function is automatically activated.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
– Press the button ⇒ page 152, fig. 114 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display
.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode
switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
General notes
The impurity filter
The impurity filter (a combined particle filter and active carbon filter) serves
as a barrier against impurities in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas reaching very high
pollution levels, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than
stated in the Service Schedule.
AC
AC
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 153 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• The engine is not running.
• The button is disconnected.
• The outside temperature is below +3°C.
• The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioning fuse is faulty.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
ified workshop.
Caution
• If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch it off with the
button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified
workshop.
• Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a qualified
workshop.
Note
• If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle
underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to
suspect a leak.
• Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
windows from misting over.
• The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is
extracted by slots designed for this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these
slots with items of clothing or other objects.
• The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows
and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. However, if the vehicle has been over-
heated by sun, the air inside can be cooled quicklier by opening the windows
for a short time.
• Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
• It is advisable to connect the air conditioning at least once a month, to
lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
capacity is detected, an Authorised Service Centre should be consulted to
check the system.
AC
AC
Leon_EN.book Seite 154 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 155
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Driving
Address
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
– Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
– Push the lever under the steering column ⇒ fig. 115 down
⇒ .
– Adjust the steering wheel in this way until the correct position is
set ⇒ fig. 116.
– Then push the lever up again firmly ⇒ .
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incor-
rect seating position can result in serious injury.
• To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 115 Adjusting the
steering wheel position
Fig. 116 Proper sitting
position for driver
Leon_EN.book Seite 155 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving156
• Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at
least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest ⇒ page 155,
fig. 116. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not
protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
• If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The
Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi-
cations are necessary.
• If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the
driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make
sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the
steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in
the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases,
you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
The Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) contains the electronic differential
lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works
together with the ABS. Both warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
The ESP is always active, and cannot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is
only possible to switch TCS off.
The TCS can be deactivated when in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.
For example:
• When driving with snow chains,
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 117 Detail of the
centre console: ESP
button
Leon_EN.book Seite 156 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 157
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
• when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.
When does the warning light switch on or flash ?
• On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry
out a function control.
• The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP
or the TCS is activated. The warning lamp will light up slowly if the TCS is
switched off.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
WARNING
• The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of
physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet
roads and when towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
• Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in ⇒ page 181,
“Intelligent technology”.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Ignition switched off, steering lock
In this position ⇒ fig. 118 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the
steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering
wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the
steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent theft of the
vehicle ⇒ .
Switching the ignition or the glow plug system on
Turn the ignition key to this position and release it. If the key cannot be turned
or it is difficult to turn from position to position , move the steering
wheel back and forth until it loosens up.
Fig. 118 Ignition key
positions
A
0
A
1
A
0
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 157 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving158
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
• The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle
comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately
blocked- Risk of accident!
• Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled
people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the
engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse-
quently resulting in an accident.
• Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical
system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
Caution
The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
its correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the starter
to turn the engine on.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position ⇒ page 157.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to slightly press down the
accelerator.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
A
2
A
0
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 158 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 159
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after
10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,
the fuel pump fuse should be checked ⇒ page 249, “Fuses”.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions ⇒ page 263, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
its correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the starter
to turn the engine on.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 157, fig. 118 . The
indication lamp
will light for engine pre-heating.
– When the warning lamp turns off, turn the key to position to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see ⇒ page 263.
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major
electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp ⇒ page 78 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
because the system must eliminate air first.
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 159 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving160
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions ⇒ page 263, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching the engine off
– Stop the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 157, fig. 118 .
After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
minutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
ment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.
WARNING
• Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is completely stationary.
• The brake servo works only when the engine is running. With the
engine switched off, more strength is needed to brake. As normal brake
operation cannot be performed, risk of accidents and serious injury may
exist.
• The steering lock can be immediately blocked once the key is removed
from the ignition lock. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
Caution
If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-
heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you
should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
A
0
Leon_EN.book Seite 160 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 161
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Driving with LPG*
switch.
Warning light OFF – Running on petrol
Warning light ON – Running on LPG
Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.
The LPG tank ⇒ page 210, “Refuelling with LPG” is in the spare wheel well
⇒ .
It is possible to change from LPG to petrol while the engine is running, even
if the vehicle is moving, by pressing the button ⇒ fig. 119 . The
selected operating mode is shown by the lights OFF (running on petrol)
and ON (running on LPG).
Starting the engine
The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used
when it was switched off.
Automatic switch from petrol to LPG
After checking, the system automatically switches from petrol to LPG
provided the following conditions are met:
• There is enough LPG in the tank.
• The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30°C.
• Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
• The button is pressed and the warning light ON is flashing or
the engine was using LPG when it was switched off.
When these conditions are met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON
lamp is lit .
Automatic switch from LPG to petrol
The system automatically switches from LPG to petrol in the following cases:
• When the engine is started.
• If the LPG tank is empty.
Fig. 119 Centre console: gas system control warning
lights and switch.
A
1 GAS
A
2
A
3
GAS
A
1
A
2
A
3
GAS
A
1
A
3
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 161 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving162
• If there is a fault in the LPG system.
• At very low temperatures below minus 10°C.
Manual switch from petrol to LPG
Press the GAS button to switch modes. When the necessary conditions are
met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON lamp is lit. If the ON
lamp flashes, the following conditions have not been met:
• There is enough LPG in the tank.
• The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30°C.
• Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
When these conditions are met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON
lamp is lit .
Manual switch from LPG to petrol
Press the button to switch modes. When the OFF lamp is lit, the
vehicle is running on petrol.
Running on petrol
Run the engine with petrol for short journeys at regular intervals to avoid
problems in the petrol system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe
burns and other injury.
• Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
• When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical,
to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
• If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-
ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.
Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
Start-Stop function*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine when the vehicle is
stopped and starts it automatically when required.
– When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neutral and release the
clutch pedal. The engine will stop.
– When the clutch pedal is pressed, the engine starts again.
– The instrument panel screen displays information about the
status of the Start-Stop function ⇒ page 164, fig. 121.
Start-Stop function conditions
• The driver's seat belt must be buckled.
• The engine hood must be closed.
• The engine must be at operating temperature
• The steering wheel must be straight.
• The vehicle must be on flat ground.
• The vehicle must not be in reverse.
• A trailer must not be connected.
A
1
A
3
A
3
A
3
GAS
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 162 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 163
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the
convenience limits (button ⇒ page 152, fig. 114 should be selected).
• The windscreen de-mist function must be off.
• If not, it requires an increase in airflow ⇒ page 152, fig. 114 for more
than three presses.
• Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO must not be set.
• The driver's door must be closed.
• The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel
engines.
• The battery charge must not be low for the next start.
• The battery temperature must be between -1°C and 55°C.
• The parking assistant, Park Assist* must not be activated.
Interrupting the Start-Stop function
In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the
engine will automatically start:
• The vehicle is moving.
• The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.
• The battery has been discharged excessively.
• The Start-Stop System has been manually deactivated.
• The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.
• The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the convenience
limits (button ⇒ page 152, fig. 114 should be selected).
•
If in an increase in airflow ⇒ page 152, fig. 114 is required for more
than three presses.
• Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO, is selected.
• The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.
• The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.
• If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfilled.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You
could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and serious
injury.
• The brake servo does not work when the engine is not running. You
need more force to stop the vehicle.
• Power assisted steering does not work when the engine is not running.
That is why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
Note
• For vehicles with the Start-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when the
engine is started, the clutch must be pressed.
• When the conditions for the Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the dash
panel displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
• The vehicle can be restarted by rotating the steering wheel three times,
that is, more than 270°.
AC
A
11
A
10
AC
A
11
A
10
Leon_EN.book Seite 163 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving164
Deactivating and activating the Start-Stop function
Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is
automatically switched on.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function
–Press the ⇒ fig. 120 located in the centre console. When the
Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton indicator
lights.
– If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts
immediately.
Manually activating the Start-Stop function
–Press the ⇒ fig. 120 located in the centre console. The indi-
cator on the button will go out.
Driver messages
When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on
the dash panel.
Note
There are different versions of the dash panel; the display of indications on
the screen may differ.
Fig. 120 The Start-Stop
function button.
A
A
A
A
Fig. 121 Display on the
dash panel during Start-
Stop function operation.
Leon_EN.book Seite 164 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 165
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch down thoroughly.
– Place the gear lever into neutral and push the lever downwards.
– Slide the gear lever to the left, and then into the reverse position
shown on the gear stick.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
The reverse lights light up when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition
is on.
WARNING
• When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a
gear is engaged and the clutch released.
• Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not rest your hand on the gear rest when driving. The pressure of your
hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
• When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch down fully to
avoid unnecessary wear and damage.
• Do not hold the car “on the clutch” up hills. This causes premature wear
and damage to the clutch.
Fig. 122 Detail of the
centre console: gear shift
pattern of a 5-speed
manual gearbox
Fig. 123 Detail of the
centre console: gear shift
pattern of a 6-speed
manual gearbox
Leon_EN.book Seite 165 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving166
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving programme).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox has three
programmes.
Selecting the economy programme
– This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain
in a lower gear.
– Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards.
– Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is
shared by all programmes for reversing.
Selecting the sport programme
– Move the lever to position S.
If you select the sport programme, S, the program is designed for a sports
mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use
Fig. 124 Centre console:
selector lever for auto-
matic gearbox / direct
shift gearbox DSG
Fig. 125 Program selec-
tion
Leon_EN.book Seite 166 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 167
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the
steering wheel controls when this option is fitted ⇒ page 169.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
– Start the vehicle.
– Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the
button on the selector lever.
The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
than 5 km/h. At higher speeds, the lock is automatically released in position
N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With
the automatic lock, the lever is prevented passing from P and N to any other
gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Fig. 126 Deactivating the
lock
Fig. 127 Driving
Leon_EN.book Seite 167 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving168
Driving
– Press and hold the foot brake.
– Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left)
⇒ page 167, fig. 127.
– Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
– Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
– Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
– Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
– Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
– Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
– Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to
put the lever into Tiptronic mode.
– Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
– Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the foot brake to prevent
rolling back.
– Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine
braking).
Descending gradients
– With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine
braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed does
not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress
the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to
3rd gear.
WARNING
• The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or
with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
tion P.
• When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected, it
is necessary to hold the vehicle with the foot brake because the vehicle will
creep at a low speed.
• Never accelerate while changing the position of the selector lever (risk
of an accident).
• The selector lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while
moving (risk of an accident).
• Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic
programme to select a lower gear.
Leon_EN.book Seite 168 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 169
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake
to avoid rolling back.
• The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even
lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a
reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in
braking distances.
• Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever
in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the
use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed
reduced.
Caution
• Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
• If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
Changing gear with the Tiptronic gear system*
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select
gears
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 128 Changing gear
with Tiptronic
Fig. 129 Steering wheel
with levers for automatic
gearbox
Leon_EN.book Seite 169 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving170
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
Changing gear with the gear stick
– Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter
the Tiptronic gate ⇒ page 169, fig. 128.
– Press the gear lever forwards ⇒ page 169, fig. 128 to select
a higher gear.
–Press the gear lever back ⇒ page 169, fig. 128 to select a
lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
– Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering
wheel to change up ⇒ page 169, fig. 129.
– Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change
down ⇒ page 169, fig. 129.
Using the levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving mode
regardless of the driving mode pre-selected.
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a
higher gear a little before it reaches the maximum permitted revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does
not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer
overrev.
If the “Tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the
“Tiptronic” will then also be in 3rd gear.
Changing gears in the normal or sport programme using the steering wheel
paddle levers
If the paddle levers ⇒ page 169, fig. 129 are used in the normal or sport
programme, the system switches temporarily to “Tiptronic” mode. To exit
“Tiptronic” mode again, press the right paddle lever towards the steering
wheel for approximately one second. You will also leave “Tiptronic” mode if
the paddle levers are not moved for a certain time.
Note
• The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the gear stick
in any position and with the vehicle in motion.
Kickdown feature
The kickdown feature is designed to give maximum accelera-
tion.
If you press the accelerator down thoroughly, the gearbox automatically
changes down, depending on speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to
take full advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle.
The gearbox does not change gear until the engine reaches the maximum
determined engine speed for the gear.
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road
surfaces. Risk of serious injury.
• Be particularly careful when using the kickdown features on slippery
road surfaces. With fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose traction and
skid.
A
+
A
–
A
+
A
–
+
Leon_EN.book Seite 170 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 171
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• You should use the kickdown feature only when traffic and weather
conditions allow it to be used safely.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly ⇒ fig. 130.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow ⇒ fig. 130 and guide the handbrake lever down
fully ⇒ .
Always apply the handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-
brake applied ⇒ .
The handbrake warning lamp
lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning turns off when the handbrake is
released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following
message* will appear on the instrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,
an audible warning is given.
WARNING
• Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The
braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to
the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
• If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating,
which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an acci-
dent. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.
Caution
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
should also be selected.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 130 Handbrake
between the front seats
Leon_EN.book Seite 171 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving172
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
– Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
– Apply the handbrake.
– The first gear should also be selected.
– Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
– Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
⇒ .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
to roll.
• If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they
point towards the kerb.
• If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
point away from the kerb.
• Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
engaging first gear.
WARNING
• Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle
unattended.
• Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
• Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
• Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in
motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever /
selector lever.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Hill-start aid*
This function is only included in vehicles fitted with ESP.
This device helps when starting uphill.
These are the basic operation conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed
down and vehicle in neutral. The system gets activated on engaging gear.
This system also works when reversing uphill.
After removing your foot from the brake pedal, the braking force is maintained
for a few seconds to prevent the vehicle from moving backward when put into
gear. This short space of time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.
This system also works when reversing uphill.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 172 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 173
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
• If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions.
Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
• If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake
immediately.
• When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle
from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down
for a few seconds before starting off.
Note
The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is
equipped with this system.
Acoustic parking aid system*
General notes
Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in
tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.
The SEAT parking system* gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-
cles behind your car.
When you are parking, the SEAT Parking System plus* warns you acoustically
and optically
20)
about obstacles “in front of” and “behind” the vehicle.
Note
To ensure the acoustic parking aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
clean and free of snow and ice.
SEAT Parking System: Description
The parking system is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring range of the
sensors starts at about:
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the
obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is
personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not
20)
Vehicles with a navigation system.
Rear
Side 0,60
Centre 1,60
Leon_EN.book Seite 173 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving174
always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
dents.
• Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear-view mirrors.
Caution
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give
any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the
system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 175.
SEAT Parking System Plus*: Description
The parking system plus is an acoustic and optical parking
aid.
Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic and optical signals. The measuring
range of the sensors starts at about:
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the
obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-
ately!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
Enabling/Disabling
Enabling
– Connects the radio navigator.
–Press the switch
on the central console ⇒ fig. 131 or on the
gear selector gate. You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone
and the LED on the switch will light up.
Front
Side 0,90
Centre 1,20
Rear
Side 0,60
Centre 1,60
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 131 Centre console:
Switch for parking aid
Leon_EN.book Seite 174 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 175
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Disabling
– Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or
–Press the switch
or
– Switch the ignition off.
Segments in the optical display
Some colour segments in front and behind and an acoustic signal enable the
driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. The amber colour
segments combined with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of an
obstacle. As the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle, the colour of the segment
changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-
timate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. Stop moving immediately! ⇒ .
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is
personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not
always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
dents.
• Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear-view mirrors.
Caution
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give
any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the
system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
• Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 175.
• There is a slight delay in the picture display.
Towing bracket
In towing mode, the rear parking sensors are not enabled when you select
reverse gear or press the switch
. This function may not be guaranteed on
towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the following restric-
tions:
SEAT Parking System*
No warning is given.
SEAT Parking System Plus*
There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when
obstacles are detected while driving forwards. The optical display changes to
towing mode.
Fault messages
If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch * starts
flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.
Please refer the problem to an Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-
shop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 175 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving176
Note
If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch
the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
Cruise control* (GRA)
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible
to drive at constant speed.
• For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in
dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads are in bad conditions
(e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci-
dent.
• Always switch the CCS off when finish to use it in order to avoid an
involuntary use.
• It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending down-
hill. The vehicle will accelerate due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
–Push the switch ⇒ fig. 132 to the left to ON.
Switching off system
– Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on
the instrument panel is lit.
21)
Fig. 132 Indicator and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
B
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 176 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 177
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
When the speed regulator (CCS) is turned off the indicator
is turned off, the
speed regulator is completely deactivated if the 1st gear is engaged.*
Setting speed*
– Press the lower part SET/SET of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 133
once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held
constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
– Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 134 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
– Press the lower part SET/– of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
21)
Depending on model version
Fig. 133 Indicator and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
A
Fig. 134 Indicator and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 177 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving178
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,
however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part
of the rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ page 177, fig. 134 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
• if the brake pedal is depressed,
• if the clutch pedal is depressed,
• if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
• when the lever is moved to the position “CANCEL” without reaching
the “OFF” position. Once the “CANCEL” operation is completed, the lever is
released and returns to its initial position.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ fig. 135 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
A
A
Fig. 135 Indicator and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
B
A
A
Fig. 136 Indicator and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
Leon_EN.book Seite 178 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving 179
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one
of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
ignition turned off.
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 179 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Leon_EN.book Seite 180 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology 181
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Practical tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
•
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so
could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably
when the brake servo is not active.
• If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than
normal.
Brake assist system (BAS)*
The Brake Assist System (BAS) function is only included in
vehicles with ESP.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
The brake assist system intervenes when you press the brake pedal very
quickly because the brake assist system registers an emergency situation. It
then very quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be acti-
vated more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
Emergency braking function
When the vehicle detects sudden braking, the hazard warning lights auto-
matically come on to warn vehicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off
when the vehicle accelerates or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.
WARNING
• The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance to the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slippery
or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
system.
• The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and
wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is
Leon_EN.book Seite 181 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology182
essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
Anti-lock brake system and traction control
M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake
pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
• The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
• The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 232.
• If the running gear or brakes are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
could be severely limited.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from
spinning when the car is accelerating.
Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration
(TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
the ABS, the TCS will also be out of action.
TCS helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The TCS is switched on automatically when the engine is started. If necessary,
it may be turned on or off pushing the button on the centre console.
When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
switched on at all times. Only in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
the wheels is required, should it be disconnected for example
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 182 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology 183
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• With compact temporary spare wheel.
• When using the snow chains.
• When driving in deep snow or on soft terrain.
• When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by “rocking.”
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
which is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner
wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque provided to the
inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
outer wheel receives a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This causes
an overall loss of lateral grip on the front shaft, resulting in understeering or
“lengthening” of the path.
The XDS system is able, using the ESP sensors and signals, to detect and
correct this effect.
The XDS, via the ESP, brakes the inner wheel thus counteracting the excess
drive torque in this wheel. This means that the path requested by the driver
is more precise,
The XDS system operates in combination with the ESP and is always active,
even when the traction control, TCS, is disconnected.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
General notes
The electronic stabilisation programme increases the
vehicle's stability on the road.
The electronic stabilisation programme helps to reduce the danger of skid-
ding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and
Steering manoeuvre recommendations.
Electronic Stabilising Program (ESP)*
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
Leon_EN.book Seite 183 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology184
maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids
the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in
case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend
to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP
recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering
manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
critical situations.
The vehicle doesn't steer itself with this function, the driver has full control of
the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
⇒ page 182.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
⇒ page 79.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other
driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
Leon_EN.book Seite 184 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology 185
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
• When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow,
press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to
spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking
any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL ⇒ page 206.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
car is accelerating ⇒ page 182.
Four-wheel drive*
On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed
to all four wheels
General notes
The four-wheel-drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-
sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving
style and the road conditions.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine
power. This combination gives the car exceptional handling and performance
capabilities – both on normal roads and in more difficult conditions, such as
snow and ice.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its four-wheel drive, your car will have plenty of traction in winter
conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend
that winter tyres or all-season tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when
winter road conditions are expected, mainly because this will give a better
braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with
four-wheel drive.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling
circumference ⇒ page 237.
WARNING
• Even with four-wheel drive, you should always adjust your speed to suit
the conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking
any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
• The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip.
Vehicle behaviour is no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive.
So do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because
the car still has good acceleration in these conditions. Failure to do so
could result in an accident.
• On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to “aqua-
plane” and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this
should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed when
“aquaplaning” begins to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car.
For this reason and for that mentioned above, always choose a driving
Leon_EN.book Seite 185 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology186
speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km
they must be “run in”. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads; road salt
When the velocity is over 80 km/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake
system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This
occurs - without warning to the driver - at regular intervals and requires a
more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving
through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter
by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be “dried” by pressing
the pedal to restore full braking effect.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is
driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
has to wear off before braking.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for dirt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion
to form on the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if you only drive low
mileages without using the brakes very much.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times from a
moderately high speed ⇒ .
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-
ified workshop and have the fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be
prepared to use more pressure on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-
ping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
brake servo works only when the engine is running.
WARNING
• When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs,
select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other
road users. Risk of accident.
• Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the motor is
stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 186 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Intelligent technology 187
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Caution
• Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do
not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
• Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position
if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note
• If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
• If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Power steering (servotronic*)
The power steering assists the driver when turning the
steering wheel (with the engine running).
The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree
of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.
The power steering will keep on working in spite servotronic* device fails. The
degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different
speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is
most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance
when parking) – more effort will be required than usual. The fault should be
corrected by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
The power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel is very hard to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the car is stationary, this will
place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the steering
wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise. It will also
reduce the idling speed of the engine.
Caution
When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
Note
• If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off
(for instance when being towed), the car can still be steered. However, more
effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
• If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-
fied workshop as soon as possible.
• The power steering requires a special hydraulic fluid. The container is
located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid level in the
reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly. The
hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.
Leon_EN.book Seite 187 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving and the environment188
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
– Do not accelerate hard.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
–Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,
reduced.
Braking effect and braking distance
The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under
which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we
recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an
Authorised Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Service
Schedule.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-
ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): The brakes should
be “dried” by pressing the pedal to restore full braking effect.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
• New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 400 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also
applies when new brake pads are fitted.
• If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.
• On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat.
Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
change down into a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if
Leon_EN.book Seite 188 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving and the environment 189
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes.
• Never let the brakes “slip” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will
increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
• Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
• Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
• Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the
brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions
before purchasing accessories ⇒ page 206, “Technical modifications”.
• If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider-
ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Always use unleaded petrol.
– Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
– For engine oil changes, do not top the reservoir up ⇒ page 220,
“Topping up engine oil ”.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 263.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest qualified workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
up when any of the described symptoms occur ⇒ page 75. If this happens,
unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the environment.
The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
• Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust
system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
Caution
Never fully drain the fuel tank because the irregularity of the fuel supply may
cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on
the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be solved
by changing to another fuel brand.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 189 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving and the environment190
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving
conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short
trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator
for
the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. See section on
Warning Lights.
WARNING
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution
• The vehicle is not designed for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel
(biodiesel) over 7% in accordance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter is
damaged when this mixture percentage is exceeded.
Economical and environmentally friendly
driving
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-
ical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Next, we provide you with some tips in
order to help reduce contamination and,at the same time, save money.
As you drive try to anticipate the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero
(disconnection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2,000 rpm.
Automatic gearbox: Accelerate in moderation and avoid the “kick-down” (full
throttle) position.
Leon_EN.book Seite 190 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving and the environment 191
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling
speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high
during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum
reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera-
ture.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having
driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding
short trips wherever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by
as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-
tion by up to 10 %.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%
more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier
even when it is not in use.
Saving electrical energy
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need
for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always
turn off electrical equipment when you do not need them. Examples of equip-
ment that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window
heating or the seat heaters*.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new Seat.
Design measures for economical recycling
• Joints and connections designed for ease of dismantling
• Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
• Increased use of single-grade materials
Leon_EN.book Seite 191 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Driving and the environment192
• Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
• Nearly all materials used can be recycled
• Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
• Recycled materials used in manufacture
• Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics
• CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioning
Compliance with prohibited materials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,
mercury, chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
• Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
• Solvent-free cavity sealing
• Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
• Solvent-free adhesives
• No CFCs used in production
• Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
• Overall water consumption reduced
• Heat recovery systems
• Water-soluble paint
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
• For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
• In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centres may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available in your Authorised Service Centre.
In vehicles with self-directing headlights, the rotation system must previ-
ously be disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialist workshop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 192 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Trailer towing 193
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
⇒ page 195.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar
weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights that are given on the
data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures
for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents ⇒ Section
“Technical data”.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the sticker
on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case, you should have additional mirrors
fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
Note
• Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the
vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
Leon_EN.book Seite 193 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Trailer towing194
• Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be found in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage
compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing
injury.
Note
• By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in due course before
going down a steep downhill. This enables you to use the engine braking to
slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
and high engine speed, always monitor the temperature indicator for the
coolant ⇒ page 53.
Electronic Stabilisation Program*
The ESP* system makes it easier to stabilise the trailer in case it skids or
swings.
Leon_EN.book Seite 194 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Trailer towing 195
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 137 Attachment
points for towing bracket
Leon_EN.book Seite 195 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Trailer towing196
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and
including the maximum resting weight.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
357 mm
569 mm
875 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
• Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
• Submit to the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
• Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's
electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialized knowledge and
tools.
• Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
• If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of
accident.
• For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
Caution
• If the electrical socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
the vehicle's electrical system.
Note
For the sports model (FR, Cupra...), fitting of a trailer bracket is not recom-
mended due to the design of the bumpers.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 196 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 197
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects remains,
bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or
road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more
damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong
sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
• Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept
closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children.
Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
• Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package
before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours;
they should be used in well ventilated areas.
• Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-
sion.
• Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch
the engine off, apply your handbrake firmly and remove the key from the
ignition.
Caution
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty
of water.
For the sake of the environment
• When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones
which are not harmful to the environment.
• The leftovers of the car care products should not be disposed of with ordi-
nary household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 197 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle198
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car wash tunnel
The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-
matic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-
work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,
the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such
as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-
ator.
After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and
pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry” the brakes by braking
several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci-
dent.
Caution
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
– First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off.
– Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove
or a brush. Use very light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. until last with a different
sponge or glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry your vehicle surface gently with a chamois leather.
–When temperature is cold, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces
to prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing
– Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. “Dry”
⇒ page 188, “Braking effect and braking distance”the brakes by
braking several times.
WARNING
• Wash your car with the ignition switched off.
• Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
injury.
Leon_EN.book Seite 198 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 199
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Caution
• Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
• Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with
a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided
wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage
system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 200.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotating jets”) ⇒ .
– Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. “Dry”
the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 188.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (“rotating nozzle”). Even at
large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible
damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Caution
• Do not use water hotter than 60°C. This could damage the vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is
also important for bumpers painted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is
to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Vehicle paint maintenance requirements
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run
off the paintwork when it is clean.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 199 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle200
A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service
Centre.
Regular wax applications help to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants. ⇒ page 197. It also protects against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-
able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in
your Authorised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 199, “Vehicle paint maintenance
requirements”.
Caution
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
• Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
• Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved
solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution
• The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
• Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based
glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
–Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois
leathers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because
they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.
Leon_EN.book Seite 200 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 201
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-
cone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-
ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. If a window cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added
to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax
deposits are not removed.
Caution
• Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
• The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements
inside the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and
last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for example sili-
cone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
Leon_EN.book Seite 201 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle202
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
• Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
• Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
– Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. You
must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times
⇒ page 188, “Braking effect and braking distance”.
Cleaning alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road
salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be
impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective
coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be
repaired immediately.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. You
must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times
⇒ page 188, “Braking effect and braking distance”.
Leon_EN.book Seite 202 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 203
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Underbody sealant
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to
check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair
work and additional anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after winter.
Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide
the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend
having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
WARNING
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 215.
• Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the parking
brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.
• Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
• Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches without protecting
your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts.
Failure to comply could result in injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol
station.
Leon_EN.book Seite 203 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle204
Vehicle interior maintenance
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleansers
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could cause substantial inju-
ries.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
– Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning the radio and climate controls
To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
– More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
– Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather maintenance
– The leather should be treated twice a year with a special leather-
care product, available in your Authorised Service Centre.
Leon_EN.book Seite 204 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 205
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Apply these products very sparingly.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this
natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides
employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.
so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the
leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be
protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-
quality natural leather are normal.
Caution
• Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
• To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Seat belts cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belts cleaning
– Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
– Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow it to dry.
– Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic
belt retractor.
WARNING
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can
impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
• Check all seat belts condition at regular intervals. If you notice that the
belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is
damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.
Leon_EN.book Seite 205 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications206
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend you to consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT
Approved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have
the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or
are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the
European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), then they must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or drink holders, should never
be fitted on the covers of, or within the working range of the airbags. Other-
wise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the
faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
nents, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work incorrectly performed.
For this reason, we recommend you that all work should be performed by an
Authorised Service Centre using genuine and SEAT
®
approved parts and
accessories.
Leon_EN.book Seite 206 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 207
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle
can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
Caution
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of
10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-
ities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
• Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of
injury if the airbag is triggered.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
radio.
Leon_EN.book Seite 207 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels208
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The fuel cap cover opens automatically with the central
locking system. The tank holds approximately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
– Lift the lid.
– Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
– Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a “click”.
– Close the drawer. Make sure you hear it click into place. The tank
cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. where further notes on fuel can be found.
Releasing the fuel tank flap by hand
If the central locking system fails, the fuel tank flap can be opened manually
as follows:
• Open the tailgate
• Remove the cover from the right side trim in the luggage compartment.
• Insert a hand and pull the locking device back
• Open the cap and take out the plug.
WARNING
• Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
− Never smoke or use any naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
− Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
− For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel
canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident
and leak.
• If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister,
please observe the following points:
Fig. 138 Tank flap open
Leon_EN.book Seite 208 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 209
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
− Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to
ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the
ground to fill it.
− Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as
possible.
− If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be
in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro-
static charge building up.
− Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution
• Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
• Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 209 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels210
LPG system*
Refuelling with LPG
The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol filler neck.
Refuelling with LPG
– Before refuelling, stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
–Open the tank flap.
– Before refuelling, please read the instructions on the pump.
– Unscrew the cap of the gas filler neck .
– Screw the required adapter on the gas filler neck .
– Refuel as indicated in the instructions on the pump.
–Unscrew the adapter .
Fig. 139 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter.
Fig. 140 LPG tank in
spare wheel well
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 210 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Screw on the cap of the gas filler neck .
– Close the tank flap.
When the hose is removed from the tank, a small amount of LPG may spill out
⇒ .
The LPG tank ⇒ fig. 140 in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres. If
the outside temperatures are very low, it may not be possible to completely
fill the LPG tank.
Pump attachments
There are a variety of types of LPG pump, and the methods of use may vary.
Therefore, let the pump operator fill the tank when refuelling for the first time
or fill from another pump.
Noises when refuelling with LPG
When refuelling with LPG, noises may be heard. These noises are insignifi-
cant.
WARNING
Failure to refuel or handle LPG in the correct way could result in a fire, cause
an explosion or lead to injury.
• LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause
severe burns and other injury.
• Switch off the engine before refuelling.
• Always disconnect mobile phones and any other radiophony appli-
ances, as electromagnetic waves may produce sparks and cause a fire.
• Do not remain in the vehicle while refuelling. If it is absolutely neces-
sary to enter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal surface before
touching the attachment again. This will prevent the generation of static
electricity and any possible fires while refuelling.
• Small quantities of LPG may leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes into
contact with skin, there is a risk of freezing.
• Do not smoke and always keep bare flames away from the tank during
refuelling. Failure to do so may lead to an explosion.
A
1
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 211 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels212
Adapter for the liquid petroleum gas (LPG) filler neck
An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of
pumps with different nozzles.
Fig. 141 General table of LPG filler neck adapters.
ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)
Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)
Bayonet adapter
EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)
The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME , the
Dish Coupling , the bayonet or the EURO adapter .
The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As
petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your
LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before
travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.
Note
The four most common types of adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter ,
the Dish Coupling adapter , the bayonet adapter and the EURO adapter
. On the whole, we recommend you carry all four adapters in your vehicle,
as some countries use more than one type of filling system. The introduction
of a single system (Euronozzle) throughout Europe is being studied.
LPG fuel
LPG is an alternative vehicle fuel and is a blend of propane and butane.
The success of LPG is due to the strict regulations concerning exhaust gas
emissions. Compared to other fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its reduced
emissions.
LPG quality and consumption
Quality requirements for LPG are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and
permit the use of LPG throughout Europe.
A difference is drawn between winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a
higher proportion of propane gas. As a result, the driving range of winter gas
may be lower (due to increased consumption) than that of summer gas.
LPG supplier network
The number of LPG pumps is constantly increasing.
Lists of existing LPG pumps may be found on Internet.
LPG safety
A series of collision tests performed on this vehicle while running with LPG
have confirmed its high level of safety.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 212 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The following
safety measures have been adopted:
• The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the
engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.
• A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine
compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.
• A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas
from entering the vehicle compartment.
• All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the
maximum possible levels of safety.
The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee
safe driving conditions ⇒ . These checks are included in the Maintenance
Programme.
WARNING
• If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi-
ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle. Do
not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the
fault repaired.
• Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle any
objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off imme-
diately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.
• LGP tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The
owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed
correctly.
• When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical,
to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Petrol
Petrol types
The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside the
fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Standard”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Regulation Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol”). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-
mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the
engine. Section “Technical Data”
Caution
• Petrol that follows EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.
However, the so-called “bioethanol fuels” available at commercial establish-
ments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.
• Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
• High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Leon_EN.book Seite 213 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels214
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and
service life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol
containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel ⇒ page 208.
Biodiesel*
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
• Biodiesel is a methyl ester obtained from rapeseed oil.
• DIN is the German abbreviation for “Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.”,
the German standards institute.
• EN means European Norm.
• FAME is the English abbreviation for “Fatty Acid Methyl Ester”.
Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)
• The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
• Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
• RME fuel is resistant to the cold down to approx. -10°C.
• At temperatures below -10°C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.
• Your vehicle is designed to be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%
blended biodiesel in accordance with standard DIN 51628.
Caution
• RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
adjusted.
• If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
which is DIN E 14,214 compliant.
• If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel
filter could become clogged.
Note
• In case of low exterior temperatures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of
the independent heating.
• The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
this reason, we recommend you that, when having run 300 or 400 km after a
fuel change, the fuel filter change must also be done. Also note the instruc-
tions in the Inspection and Maintenance plan.
• If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we
recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
order to avoid damage to the injection system.
Leon_EN.book Seite 214 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.
Therefore, “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22°C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24°C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15°C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24°C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution
Do not mix fuel additives (“thinners”, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 217.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know
exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work
carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions ⇒ page 206. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
hazardous area ⇒ .
Leon_EN.book Seite 215 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels216
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk
of accident or fire.
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the
engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
• Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
• Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
• Keep children away from the vehicle.
• Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
• Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This
is a fire hazard.
• Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the
points where the jump leads are attached ⇒ page 264. The battery could
explode.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
• Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot.
If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
• Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
• Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths
and tools, in the engine compartment.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
• If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the
engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the
rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the
following points:
− Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
− Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get
trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
− Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is
engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could
move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
• If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo-
nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above
warnings:
− Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when
this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
− Do not smoke.
− Never work near naked flames.
− Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution
When changing or topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 216 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
rest position.
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dashboard
⇒ fig. 142 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action ⇒ .
– Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the
bonnet.
– Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for this
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
Fig. 142 Detail of foot-
well area on driver's side:
lever for unlocking the
bonnet.
Fig. 143 Arrester hook
for bonnet.
Leon_EN.book Seite 217 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels218
• Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet,
then carefully open the bonnet.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 215.
Closing the bonnet
– Raise the bonnet slightly.
– Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
– At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and
completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
• After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
• If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk
of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.
Specifications
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of high quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the
engine and its long useful life, when topping up or replacement is necessary
use only those oils that conform to the requirements of the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil
conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at
atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil
may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example,
long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all
conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together
the different standards for petrol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
both types of engines.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 218 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
period, an oil change is not required.
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity
22)
.
These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter
(DPF)
a)
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 507 00
Fig. 144 Types of oil
according to temperature
22)
Viscosity: oil density
Fig. 145 Engine oil
dipstick.
Leon_EN.book Seite 219 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels220
Checking oil level
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached then stop.
– Wait two minutes.
– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
– Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ⇒ page 219,
fig. 145. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
–Do not add oil.
Oil level in area
–Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should afterwards be in
zone .
Oil level in area
–Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone .
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil
consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 215.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 215.
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
C
A
A
WARNING (continued)
A
A
Fig. 146 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
Leon_EN.book Seite 220 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Unscrew cap from oil filler opening ⇒ fig. 146..
– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
– As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram ⇒ page 273.
Engine oil specification ⇒ page 218.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 215, “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment”.
• Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
• Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
• When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori-
zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
• Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
• Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children until it is disposed of.
Caution
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and
specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
A
B
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 221 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels222
• Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
• Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil.
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40°C.
WARNING
• The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the
coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the
reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
• The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to
provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that
can be expected. At extremely cold ambient temperatures, the coolant
could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also
not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!
Caution
• Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
causing serious damage to the engine.
• The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 222 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 215.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap ⇒ .
Checking coolant level
– Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
– If the level is underneath the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
–Only use new coolant.
– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
– Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment diagram ⇒ page 273.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications ⇒ page 222.
Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not avail-
able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up
to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
⇒ page 222.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 215.
Fig. 147 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
Leon_EN.book Seite 223 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels224
• When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do
not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is
a burn injury risk.
Caution
• When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
• If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with
fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 148 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.
Leon_EN.book Seite 224 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 215.
Caution
• Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
• Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing the front windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Changing wiper blades can be done in both the rest and horizontal
positions. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
– Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Press on the side tabs and release the blade moving it in the
direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 149.
Fitting the wiper blade
– Insert the tab into the slot of the blade ⇒ fig. 149.
Fig. 149 Changing the
front wiper blades
A
A
A
1
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 225 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels226
– Move the blade towards the arm in the opposite direction of the
arrow ,until it clicks into position ⇒ fig. 149.
– Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
• Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
could cause damage.
• Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Note
• The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the
bonnet is properly closed.
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
A
1
Fig. 150 Remove rear
window wiper blade
Fig. 151 Mount rear
window wiper blade
Leon_EN.book Seite 226 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ⇒ fig. 150.
– Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove
the blade ⇒ fig. 150.
Fitting the wiper blade
– With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
– Place the blade as shown in the ⇒ fig. 151 and slide the adapter
along until it fits into place.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
• Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
– Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram ⇒ page 273. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
Fig. 152 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
Leon_EN.book Seite 227 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels228
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
“MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 75.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe
the warnings ⇒ page 215.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Program indicates the brake fluid change
intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 215 in
“Working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with the US standard
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
• Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and
observe the warnings ⇒ page 215.
• Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
• Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance
Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency
of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution
Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 228 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Battery
Warnings on handling the battery
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the
risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
• Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
particles containing lead.
• Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and
eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
• Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling
cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause
injury.
• A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
• Keep children away from acid and batteries.
• Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the
engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
• Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
• When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
• Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never
reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
• Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C.
• Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
• Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a
damaged battery immediately.
Caution
• Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
• Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective
gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the bat-
tery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 229 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels230
• If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from frost. If it “freezes” it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
– Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 215 ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on
page 229.
– Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
– If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until
they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram ⇒ page 273.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.
There are two different colours:
• Black: correct charge status.
• Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a
specialist workshop.
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
• We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This
standard applies as of 2001.
• Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 229.
Leon_EN.book Seite 230 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Checking and refilling levels 231
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
household waste.
Leon_EN.book Seite 231 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres232
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in ⇒ page 188.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
• New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu-
larly carefully to avoid risk of accident.
• Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
• If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when
driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
bar to the values given on the sticker.
Leon_EN.book Seite 232 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres 233
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced ⇒ .
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure
value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is
an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
• A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
• If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitoring
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system uses the speed sensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by
analysing the speed and frequency spectrum of each wheel.
For optimum performance, use genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and
adjust tyre pressures regularly.
Whenever the tyre pressures are changed or one or more tyres are changed,
the system should be Reset by pressing the SET switch on the central console.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument cluster display. The system uses
ESP ⇒ page 183.
Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
increases about 0.1 bar for each 10°C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
heats up while the vehicle is being driven and the tyre pressure will rise
accordingly. For this reason, you should only adjust the tyre pressures when
they are cold (I.e. approximately at ambient temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you should
check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.
A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
WARNING
• Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage or
even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!
• An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and
causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
Leon_EN.book Seite 233 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres234
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least
one tyre is insufficient.
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the engine off.
– Check the tyre(s).
– Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Fig. 153 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 154 Diagram for
changing wheels
Leon_EN.book Seite 234 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres 235
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
⇒ page 234, fig. 153, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on
the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries ⇒ .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
⇒ page 232.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown ⇒ page 234, fig. 154. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
• The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to
the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
risk of “aquaplaning”
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
• If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked
by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
• Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Anti-puncture tyres
Anti-puncture tyres allow you to continue driving even with a
punctured tyre, in the majority of cases.
Vehicles equipped with anti-puncture
23)
tyres from the factory indi-
cate the loss of tyre pressure on the instrument panel.
23)
Depending upon version and country.
Leon_EN.book Seite 235 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres236
Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)
– Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)
switched on, or switch on ⇒ page 182.
– Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
– Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
– Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
– Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
“DSST”, “Eufonia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if
necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this
implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions ⇒ .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
• smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
• there is a smell of rubber,
• the vehicle vibrates,
• there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using anti-puncture
tyres?
• If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
• It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
starts overheating and gives off smoke.
WARNING
When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
considerably impaired.
• The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and
weather conditions. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
• Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
• Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
• If one or more tyres is being driven in emergency conditions, the driving
quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note
• The anti-puncture tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure because they
are supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be
detected with a visual inspection.
• Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency
conditions.
Leon_EN.book Seite 236 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres 237
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling ⇒ .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (I.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
RTyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
TSpeed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
• A direction of rotation symbol
• “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT ... 1103...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-
ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
• We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
• Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
• Never use old tyres or those with an unknown “history of use”.
• If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the
brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
• All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note
• For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
• If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Leon_EN.book Seite 237 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres238
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
even if it is the same model ⇒ page 206.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. ⇒ The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
• The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
to them.
•
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Caution
The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles
handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 237, “New tyres and wheels” determines the
following speed limits for winter tyres: ⇒
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 237, “New tyres and wheels”.
Leon_EN.book Seite 238 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Wheels and tyres 239
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise,
this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on front wheels and only for tyres 195/65R15
and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch link chains
which do not protrude more than 15 mm ⇒ page 272. For 235/35R19 tyres,
the use of snow chains is not permitted.
Other tyres may use fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9 mm,
including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact
with the wheel housing.
Caution
You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
Note
• In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
legal requirements of the country should be followed.
• We recommend that you ask your Approved Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Leon_EN.book Seite 239 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when240
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
– Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
– Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
• Jack*
• Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
• Box spanner for wheel bolts*
• Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
• Towing eye
• Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,
or are optional extras.
WARNING
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten
the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the
required torque. Risk of accident.
• The jack* supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels
on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles
or other loads. Risk of injury.
• Use the jack* only on firm, level ground.
• Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.
• If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured
by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 240 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 241
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Compact temporary spare wheel* (emergency wheel)
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel
is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The
standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary
spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,
thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tempo-
rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow
chains, fit the compact temporary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.
You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use
this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
• The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possible.
The emergency tyre pressure for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18
135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all other tyre dimensions please refer to the label
on the fuel cap. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
• Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-
dent.
• Never use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
accident.
• No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on
the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Note
• Vehicles with Brembo brakes must never use emergency wheels. These
vehicles are supplied with a tyre repair kit.
Fig. 155 Luggage
compartment. Access to
the spare wheel
Leon_EN.book Seite 241 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when242
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a spare wheel) is
stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System “Tyre repair kit”.
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing compound to repair the
puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note
• Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
– All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
–Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
–Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
If you have to change the wheel on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
– Pull off the hub cap. See ⇒ page 243, fig. 156.
– Slacken the wheel bolts.
– Raise the car with the jack in the corresponding zone.
Leon_EN.book Seite 242 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 243
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Remove the wheel and then mount the spare wheel
– Lower the vehicle.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the box spanner.
– Replace the wheel trim.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
– Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
– Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be
120 Nm.
Note
• If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
• For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has
been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel
bolts.
Removing
– Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated
ring, located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
⇒ fig. 156.
–Pull off the hub cap.
Fig. 156 Changing the
wheel: Removing a hub
cap
Leon_EN.book Seite 243 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when244
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
– Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
– Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
– Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Loosening
–Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to the
left ⇒ fig. 157.
Tightening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
– An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 157 Changing the
wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts
Leon_EN.book Seite 244 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 245
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with
the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
• If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with
a jack.
– Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel
to be changed ⇒ fig. 158.
– Place the jack under the jacking point and turn the crank until the
arm of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the door
sill.
– Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under
the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the
ground ⇒ fig. 159.
– Raise the jack until the defective wheel is just clear of the ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
⇒ fig. 158. There is only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use
Fig. 158 The jacking
points
Fig. 159 Fitting the jack
Leon_EN.book Seite 245 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when246
a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
• Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to
do so could result in an accident.
• The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,
change the wheel as described below:
Removing a wheel
– Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
⇒ fig. 160.
Fitting a wheel
– Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These
surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
wheel bolts. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the
tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Note
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
Fig. 160 Changing the
wheel: Hexagonal socket
in screwdriver handle to
turn the wheel bolts
Leon_EN.book Seite 246 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 247
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Anti-theft wheel bolts
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go ⇒ fig. 161.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Error code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of
the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the
wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give
optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)*
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound
container.
Fig. 161 Anti-theft wheel
bolt
Leon_EN.book Seite 247 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when248
Notes for the proper use of the air compressor are included in an additional
instruction leaflet.
WARNING
• Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the
tyre has been damaged by driving the car after the tyre has lost its air.
• Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning
compressor and sealing compound carefully.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
• Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit-
able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully
to the next available qualified workshop.
For the sake of the environment
Used sealing compound containers should be disposed of at a proper facility.
Note
• If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull
it off like a piece of foil.
• Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.
• Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
–Apply the handbrake firmly.
–Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
– All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
“General information and safety notes.”
– Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
–Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Leon_EN.book Seite 248 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 249
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing compound
– The instructions on the container give detailed information on
how to use the sealing compound.
Inflating the tyre.
– Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
– Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
– Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power point.
– Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
sure gauge.
Completing the repair
– Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
– Fit the valve cap.
– Unplug the compressor from the socket.
– Return all tools to their proper storing location.
Note
• If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre
pressures using the SET button on the central console.
• The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6
minutes.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
Blown fuses must be replaced
Fig. 162 Left side of dash
panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 163 Fuse box cover
in engine compartment
Leon_EN.book Seite 249 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when250
Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Identify the fuse corresponding to the damaged electric
consumer ⇒ page 252.
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
– Switch off the ignition and its failed electrical component.
– Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing
the tabs towards the centre of the cover ⇒ page 249, fig. 163.
– Identify the fuse for the failed component ⇒ page 252.
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
– Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Fuses colour code
WARNING
Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a
higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause
damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note
• If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Colour Amperes
light brown 5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
Natural (white) 25
Green 30
orange 40
Red 50
white 80
Blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
Leon_EN.book Seite 250 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 251
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
• If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
• Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
SEAT dealers.
• In addition to the fuses listed in the following tables, there are other fuses
which must be replaced by the Technical Service Workshop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 251 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when252
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amperes
1
Diagnosis Switchboard/ Instrument lighting/
Headlight control switchboard/ Flow meter/
Heated wipers/ Engine management/ AFS Head-
lamps
10
2
Engine control unit/ ABS-ESP switchboard/ Auto-
matic gearbox/ Instrument panel/ Trailer switch-
board/ Light switch / Brake sensor/ Power
steering/ Right and left headlights
10
3 Airbag 5
4
Heating/ Reverse switch/ ASR-ESP switch/ Elec-
trochrome mirror/ Park Pilot/ Oil level sensor
5
5 Right xenon headlight 10
6 Left xenon headlight 10
7 Vacant
8 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 5
9 Vacant
10 Vacant
11 Vacant
12 Central locking 15
13
Diagnosis/ Light switch/ Rain sensor/ Heated rear
window
10
14
Automatic gearbox / Heating/ Automatic gearbox
lever
10
15 Vacant
16 Vacant
17 Alarm 5
18 Kombi / levers with START STOP 5
19 Fog light aid 20
20 Navigation/radio with START STOP 15
21 Engine management 10
22 Fan switch 40
23 Electric windows (front) 30
24 Body Control Unit 20
25 Rear window heater 25
26 Rear electric windows 30
27 Engine (fuel control unit/pump relay) 15
28 Convenience controls 30
29 Vacant
30 Automatic gearbox 20
31 Vacuum pump 20
32 Vacant
33 Sunroof 25
34 Comfort switchboard/Central locking system 25
35 Vacant
36 Headlight washer system 20
37 Heated seats 30
38 Engine management 10
39 Telephone with START STOP 10
Number Consumer Amperes
Leon_EN.book Seite 252 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 253
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.
Fuses layout, engine compartment, left part
Fuses
40 Fan switch 40
41 Rear wiper motor / Switchboard wiring 20
42 12 V socket/ Cigarette lighter 20
43 Trailer bracket preinstallation 15
44 Trailer bracket preinstallation 20
45 Trailer bracket preinstallation 15
46 Vacant
47 Engine management 10
48 Engine management 10
49 Vacant
Number Consumer Amperes
1 Windscreen wipers 30
2 DQ200 gearbox 30
3 Cable control unit 5
Number Consumer Amperes
4 ABS 20
5 AQ gearbox 15
6 Instrument panel/Steering column 5
7 Ignition key 40
8 Radio 15
9 Telephone/TomTom Navigator 5
10
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
11 Vacant
12 Electronic control unit 5
13
Petrol injection module supply 15
Diesel injection module supply 30
14 Coil 20
15
Engine management 5
Pump relay 10
16 Right lighting 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20
Water pump 10
Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20
21
a)
Lambda probe
15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
Number Consumer Amperes
Leon_EN.book Seite 253 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when254
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the failed component.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
very least, the following spare bulbs, which are essential for road safety,
should be kept in the vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Indicator - PY21W
Xenon headlights
24)
/ self-adjusting*
Dipped and full beam - D1S
25)
Daylight - P21W SLL
Position - W5W
Indicators -PY21W
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Fixed rear light
Stop/Position - P21W
26)
Indicator - P21W
23
a)
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
Engine management 15
24 AKF, gearbox valve 10
25
a)
ABS pump
40
26 Left lighting 30
27
a)
Engine management 40
Engine management 50
28 Vacant
29
a)
Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 Ignition key 50
a)
Ampere rating according to motorisation
Number Consumer Amperes
24)
On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
on the automatic control system incorporated.
25)
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
stances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
26)
Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 254 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 255
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Rear tailgate light unit
Fog light (driver's side) - P21W
Reverse (passenger's side) - P21W
Position - W5W
Side indicator
Side indicator - W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Glove box lamp
Glove box lamp - W5W
Note
• Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the life expectancy of the lighting system. By switching on the
lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
• Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest
of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.
• Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should
be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to
change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Main headlight lamps
Indicator
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Fig. 164 Main headlight
lamps
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
Leon_EN.book Seite 255 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when256
Turn signal lamps
– Raise the bonnet.
– Rotate the lamp holder ⇒ fig. 165 to the left and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Dipped beam lights
– Raise the bonnet
Fig. 165 Turn signal
lamps
A
A
Fig. 166 Dipped head-
lights
Fig. 167 Dipped head-
lights
Leon_EN.book Seite 256 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 257
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
– Remove the loops ⇒ page 256, fig. 166 in the direction of
the arrow and remove the cover.
– Remove the connector ⇒ page 256, fig. 167 from the bulb.
– Disengage the retainer spring ⇒ page 256, fig. 167 pressing
inwards to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Main beam lights
– Raise the bonnet
– Remove the cover ⇒ fig. 168 by pulling on this.
– Remove the connector ⇒ fig. 169 from the bulb.
– Press the spring ⇒ fig. 169 inwards and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly
into the cut-out on the reflector.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 168 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 169 Main beam
headlights
A
C
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 257 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when258
Side lights
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the cover ⇒ fig. 170 by pulling on this.
– Extract the lamp holder ⇒ fig. 171 outwards.
– Replace the bulb by pulling this out and inserting the replace-
ment.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Rear lights
• On the body
- Indicator, side and brake light
• On the tailgate
- Left side: position and fog lights.
- Right side: reverse and position.
Fig. 170 Side lights
Fig. 171 Side lights
A
D
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 258 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 259
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Indicator, side and brake lights on the bodywork
– Press on the side pin outwards and take out the lamp holder.
– Extract the failed bulb and change it for a new one.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when
fitting the lamp holder.
Position light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate
–Open the tailgate.
– Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ⇒ fig. 173.
Fig. 172 Indicator, side
and brake lights on the
bodywork
Fig. 173 Lights on the
tailgate
Fig. 174 Removing the
lampholder
Leon_EN.book Seite 259 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when260
– Take the lampholder out pressing on the securing pins and
extract it outwards ⇒ page 259, fig. 174.
– Replace the faulty lamp, rotating it to the left and outwards.
– Installation is in the reverse order.
Side indicators
– Press the indicator on one of its sides to take it out.
– Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
– First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs ⇒ fig. 175, arrow .
– Insert the indicator as shown by the arrow ⇒ fig. 175.
Fig. 175 Side indicator
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 260 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 261
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Luggage compartment lights
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the inside edge of this -arrow-
using the flat side of a screwdriver ⇒ fig. 176.
– Press the lamp sideways and remove from its housing
⇒ fig. 177.
– Installation is in the reverse order.
Fig. 176 Luggage
compartment light
Fig. 177 Luggage
compartment light
Leon_EN.book Seite 261 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when262
Registration light
– To remove the tulip-shaped fitting, unscrew the bolts ⇒ fig. 178.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ fig. 179.
– Installation is in the reverse order.
Glove box lamp*
– Insert screwdriver above, between the light and the glove box.
– Carefully remove the light Next lift the light out sideways.
–Replace the bulb.
– Insert the light on the connector side, first underneath then push
at the top until it clicks into place.
Fig. 178 Registration
light
Fig. 179 Registration
light
Leon_EN.book Seite 262 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 263
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Sunroof light
– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure ⇒ fig. 181.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ fig. 181.
– Installation is in the reverse order.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be
connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
documentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
• The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicle elec-
trical system.
Fig. 180 Removing
sunroof light
Fig. 181 Removing
sunroof light
Leon_EN.book Seite 263 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when264
How to jump start: description
⇒ fig. 182 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.
Jump lead terminal connections
– Switch off the ignition on both vehicles ⇒ .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive ⇒ fig. 182
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery ⇒ .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal
component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the
engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
connect it to a point near the battery ⇒ .
5. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or
two minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle
with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are
generated when the leads are disconnected.
10. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse
order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
Fig. 182 How to connect
the jump leads
A
A
A
B
A
+
A
+
A
-
A
X
Leon_EN.book Seite 264 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 265
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
WARNING
• Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 215, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat
battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
• Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger
of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
• Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the
negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could
be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
• Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
• The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
• Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
Leon_EN.book Seite 265 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when266
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable ⇒ page 263.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage the 2
nd
or the 3
rd
gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
– Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake earlier than you
would normally, but with a more gentle pressure on the brake.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
– Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
enced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 266 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when 267
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
• Put the selector lever into position “N”.
• Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
• Do not tow further than 50 km.
• If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
• Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
• For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
• If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
• If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
• The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
• The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
notes on ⇒ page 266.
Trailer eyes
Fig. 183 The front right
section of the vehicle:
Fitting the front towing
eye
Fig. 184 Fitting the
towing eye to the rear of
the vehicle
Leon_EN.book Seite 267 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
If and when268
Fitting the towing eye
– Take the towing ring from the onboard tool set.
– Remove the front cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.
– Remove the rear cover by pressing down on the right hand side,
for FR and Cupra models. For all other versions, remove the rear
cover by pressing on the lower part.
– Screw the towing eye as shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the
limit position in the front ⇒ page 267, fig. 183 or rear
⇒ page 267, fig. 184 threaded hole.
Leon_EN.book Seite 268 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
General notes on the technical data 269
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
Outstanding information
Important considerations
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence
over this data.
All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The
vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle
registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,
for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
Leon_EN.book Seite 269 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
General notes on the technical data270
Vehicle identification data
The most important data are given on the type plate and the
vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the
luggage compartment.
The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: ⇒ fig. 185.
These data are also provided in the Maintenance Program.
Production control number
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Model code number
Model designation / engine power output
Engine and gearbox code letters
Paintwork number / interior trim code
Optional equipment codes
Consumption values
CO
2
emissions values
Data from 2 to 9 are also provided in the Maintenance Program.
Consumption figures and CO
2
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) mixed
Fig. 185 Vehicle data
sticker – boot
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
A
A
B
A
C
Leon_EN.book Seite 270 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
General notes on the technical data 271
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Data on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle
weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
istic test method based on normal everyday driving.
The following test conditions are applied:
Note
• Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the
vehicle condition.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒ .
WARNING
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions
and requirements.
• Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Urban cycle
The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving
is then simulated.
Extra urban
cycle
In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently
accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday
driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Total con-
sumption
The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting
of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra
urban cycle.
CO
2
emis-
sions
The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to
calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is
then analysed to evaluate the CO
2
content and other emis-
sions.
Leon_EN.book Seite 271 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
General notes on the technical data272
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data ⇒ .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
• For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in
countries where higher speeds are permitted.
• Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If
the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced ⇒ .
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒ . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure
value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is
an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Leon_EN.book Seite 272 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 273
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,
otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are described in the ⇒ page 215.
Overview
Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data as of
⇒ page 269 are given.
Fig. 186 Diagram for the
location of the various
elements
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 273 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data274
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Maximum speed in km/h 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 9,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 13,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1746
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1251
Front gross axle weight in kg 890
Rear gross axle weight in kg 895
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Leon_EN.book Seite 274 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 275
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 9,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1819
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1324
Front gross axle weight in kg 969
Rear gross axle weight in kg 899
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Leon_EN.book Seite 275 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data276
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Trailer without brakes 710
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Running on LPG Running on petrol
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 72 (98)/ 5600 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 144/ 3800 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1595
4/ 1595
Fuel LPG
Super 95 octane rating or Regular 91
octane rating
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Running on LPG Running on petrol
Maximum speed in km/h 181 184
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,4 8,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 12,6 12,2
Leon_EN.book Seite 276 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 277
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 bhp)
Engine specifications
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1836
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1341
Gross front axle weight in kg 935
Gross rear axle weight in kg 950
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 670
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 118 (160)/ 4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1798
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Leon_EN.book Seite 277 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data278
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 213 213
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 5,6 5,5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 7,9 7,8
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1850 1865
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1355 1370
Gross front axle weight in kg 1035 1035
Gross rear axle weight in kg 898 898
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 670 680
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 278 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 279
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Petrol engine 2.0 l 155 kW (211 HP)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 155 (211)/ 5300-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1700 - 5200
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 233 233
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 5,2 5,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 7,2 7,1
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1890 1920
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1395 1425
Gross front axle weight in kg 1045 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 900 900
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Leon_EN.book Seite 279 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data280
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 177 kW (240 hp). Cupra
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 690 710
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 177 (240)/ 5700-6300
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 300/ 2200-5500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 247
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 4,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 6,4
Leon_EN.book Seite 280 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 281
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 195 kW (265 bhp). Cupra R
Engine specifications
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1945
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1450
Front gross axle weight in kg 1047
Rear gross axle weight in kg 926
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 720
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 195 (265)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 2500-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Leon_EN.book Seite 281 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data282
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 250 (limited)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 4,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 6,2
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1945
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1450
Gross front axle weight in kg 1050
Gross rear axle weight in kg 925
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 720
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 282 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 283
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 66 kW (90 HP)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 66 (90) /4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/1800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 174
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 13,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1868
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1365
Front gross axle weight in kg 1015
Rear gross axle weight in kg 896
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 680
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Leon_EN.book Seite 283 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data284
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 7,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 11,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1868
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1365
Front gross axle weight in kg 1015
Rear gross axle weight in kg 896
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Leon_EN.book Seite 284 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 285
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp). Ecomotive
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Trailer without brakes 680
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 188
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 7,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 10,9
Leon_EN.book Seite 285 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data286
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 litre TDI 77 kW (105 bhp). Automatic
Engine specifications
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1820
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1325
Front gross axle weight in kg 970
Gross rear axle weight in kg 875
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 660
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Leon_EN.book Seite 286 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 287
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 7,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 11,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1890
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1395
Front gross axle weight in kg 1044
Rear gross axle weight in kg 894
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 690
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 287 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data288
Diesel engine 2.0 l 103 kW (140 HP)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 205 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,3 6,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 9,3 9,3
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1885 1925
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1390 1430
Gross front axle weight in kg 1042 1077
Gross rear axle weight in kg 885 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Leon_EN.book Seite 288 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 289
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 690 710
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750-2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 214
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 8,2
Leon_EN.book Seite 289 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data290
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil filling capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1915
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1420
Gross front axle weight in kg 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 895
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 690
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 290 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Technical Data 291
Safety First Controls and equipment Practical tips Technical Data
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Capacities
Tyre pressure
Length, width 4,315 mm/ 1,768 mm
Height at kerb weight 1,459 mm
Front and rear projection 949 mm/ 788 mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track width
a)
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front Rear
1,525 mm 1,509 mm
1,539 mm 1,523 mm
Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
Leon_EN.book Seite 291 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Leon_EN.book Seite 292 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index 293
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
AFS (curve lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Air conditioning system
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 71
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 126
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 126
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Automatic gearbox
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 166
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window
124
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 138
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Belt tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 188
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Leon_EN.book Seite 293 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index294
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Bulb changes
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Bulb defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 157
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic locking system for involuntary
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Centre console with drinks holder . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Changing gear with the Tiptronic gear system 169
Changing the lamps
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Changing the rear light lamps
Position light, fog light and rear light on the
tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Changing the rear lights
Indicator, side and brake lights on the
bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 230
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Child seats
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cloth seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Coming/leaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Coolant level
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Leon_EN.book Seite 294 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index 295
Coolant temperature
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cruise control system
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Cruise control*
Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 178
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Dash panel menu
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Dash panel menus
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 42
Display (without warning or information texts) . 59
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 182
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Economically / With Respect for the
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Dynamic curve lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 115
E
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
EDS
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 158
Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 83
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . 117, 181
emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Emergency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emission control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Leon_EN.book Seite 295 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index296
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 215
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Engine oil pressure
monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 183
Example of menu use
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 67
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Example of the use of the menus
Open the Configuration menu with the MFD
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Open the Configuration menu with the steering
wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 67
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
F
Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 116
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Front interior light
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 42
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Frontal airbags
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fuel tank
See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
G
G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
General overview of the engine compartment 273
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
GRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Leon_EN.book Seite 296 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index 297
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 171
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 131
adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 131
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
head restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 13
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Headlight washer system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Heated window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Indicators
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
J
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
L
Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Load compartment in the boot
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 161, 210
LPG system
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 118
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Maintenance
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
MEDIA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . 207
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Leon_EN.book Seite 297 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index298
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 20
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Power steering system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 197
R
Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear fog light
Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Rear window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Repairs
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reverse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Running in
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
S
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Leon_EN.book Seite 298 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index 299
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 43
frontal airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 132
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Seat belts protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 272
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 159
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 159
Start-Stop
deactivating and activating . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Steering wheel audio controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 155
Stowage area
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Stowage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Stowage compartments
Front left hand side seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sunroof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Switches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
T
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tank
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Leon_EN.book Seite 299 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index300
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 21
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 272
To fold down the seat back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tow starting
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Trailer turn signals
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 118
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 242
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 247
Tyre-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 247
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 232
U
Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Unlocking and locking
Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
V
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Vehicle paintwork
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 197
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Volumetric sensor*
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
W
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Warning reports
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Warning texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 199
Water
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 224
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 272
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 272
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 29
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why to wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Leon_EN.book Seite 300 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
Index 301
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Changing the front blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 215
Leon_EN.book Seite 301 Dienstag, 8. September 2009 5:25 17
LEON OWNER’S MANUAL
Inglés 1P0012003CL (07.09) (GT9)
1P0012003CL
LEON Inglés (07.09)
Portada LEON.qxd:Maquetación 1 1/9/09 13:33 Página 3
